section 15430 -plumbing specialties part 1 · pdf fileand address of the utility company: ......

PLUMBING SPECIAL TI

SECTION 15430 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes plumbing specialties for water distribution systems; soil, waste, and vent systems; and storm drainage systems.

B. Products installed but not furnished under this Section include water meters that will be furnished by the utility company to the site and ready for installation. This is the name and address of the utility company:

1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with following minimum working pressure ratings, except where otherwise indicated:

1. Water Distribution Systems, Below Ground: 150 psig. 2. Water Distribution Systems, Above Ground: 125 psig. 3. Soil, Waste, and Vent Systems: la-foot head of water. 4. Storm Drainage Systems: la-foot head of water. 5. Sanitary Sewage, Pumped Piping Systems: 75 psig.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Submit product data including rated capacities of selected models and weights (shipping, installation, and operation). Indicate materials, finishes, dimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components; and piping and wiring connections for the following plumbing specialty products:

1. Water met~rs. 2. Backflow preventers. 3. Water pressure regulators. 4. Water filters. 5. Thermostatic water-mixing valves and water-tempering valves. 6. Strainers. 7. Hose bibbs, wall hydrants, and post and sanitary hydrants. 8. Drain valves. 9. Water hammer arresters.

lSCO Irrigation District - Office - #01-267 Shaft!

Section 15430 - of 17 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

10. Trap seal primer valves. 11. Backwater valves. 12. Cleanouts, cover plates, and access panels. 13. Air-admittance valves. 14. Vent caps, vent terminals, and roof flashing assemblies. 15. Floor drains, open receptors, trench drains, and roof drains. 16. Sleeve penetration systems.

C. Maintenance data for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance manuals as specified in Division 1 Section "Project Closeout" for the following:

1. Water meters. 2. Backflow preventers. 3. Water pressure regulators. 4. Water filters. 5. Thermostatic water-mixing valves and water-tempering valves. 6. Sanitary hydrants.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation.

B. Electrical Component Standard: NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code."

C. Listing and Labeling: Provide equipment that is listed and labeled.

1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the "National Electrical Code," Article 100.

2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

D. Design Concept: The Drawings indicate capacities, sizes, and dimensional requirements of system components. Components having equal performance characteristics that deviate from the indicated size and dimensions may be considered, provided deviations do not change the design concept or intended performance. The burden of proof for equality of products is on the Contractor. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Substitutions."

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below.. Package them with protective covering for storage and identify with labels clearly describing contents.

B. Water Filter Cartridges: Furnish quantity not less than 200 percent of amount of each type and size installed.

C. Operating Keys (Handles): Furnish 1 extra key for each key-operated hose bibb and hydrant installed.

Shafter-Wasco Irrigation District - Office-#Ol-267

PLUMBING SPECIAL TI

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Water Meters:

a. Badger Meter, Inc. b. Carlon Meter Co., Inc. c. Hays Div., Romac Industries. d. Hersey Products, Inc., Grinnell Corp. e. Kent Meters, Inc. f. Neptune Water Div., Schlumberger Industries, Inc. g. Precision Meters, Inc. h. Sensus Technologies, Inc., A BTR Co. L Sparling Instruments, Inc. j. Water Specialties Corp.

2. Backflow Preventers:

a. Ames Co., Inc. b. Cash by AW. Cash Valve Mfg. Corp. c. CIa-Val Co. d. Conbraco Industries, Inc. e. Febco. f. Hersey Products, Inc., Grinnell Corp. g. Sparco, Inc. h. Watts Regulator Co. L Wilkins Regulator Div., Zurn Industries, Inc.

3. Water Pressure Regulators:

a. Bermad. b. Cash by AW. Cash Valve Mfg. Corp. c. CIa-Val Co. d. Conbraco Industries, Inc. e. G A Industries, Inc. f. Honeywell Braukmann. g. Keckley by O.c. Keckley Co. h. Spence Engineering Co., Inc. L Watts Regulator Co. j. Wilkins Regulator Div., Zurn Industries, Inc.

1SCO Irrigation District - Office - #01-267 Shaft!


4. Water Filters:

a. Balston, Inc., Filter Systems Div., Whatman, PLC. b. Campbell Manufacturing, Inc. c. CUNO, Inc. Unit, Commercial Intertech Corp. d. Eden Equipment Co. e. Filpro Corp. f. Filterite Div., Memtec Corp. g. Filterspun Div., Service Filtration Corp. h. Filtrine Manufacturing Co. L Hytrex Div., Osmonics, Inc. j. Keystone Filter Div., Met-Pro Corp. k Manitowoc Equipment Works Div., Manitowoc Co., Inc. 1. Matt-Sun, Inc. m. Pall Process Filtration Co. n. Plymouth Products Div., AMETEK, Inc. o. Pura, Inc. p. Watts Regulator Co.

5. Thermostatic Water-Mixing Valves:

a. Lawler Manufacturing Co., Inc. b. Leonard Valve Co. c. Powers Process Controls Unit, Mark Controls Corp. d. Symmons Industries, Inc. e. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.

6. Water-Tempering Valves:

a. Cash by A.W. Cash Valve Mfg. Corp. b. Holby Valve Co., Inc. c. Heat-Timer Corp. d. Honeywell Braukman. e. Leonard Valve Co. f. Sparco, Inc. g. Watts Regulator Co.

7. Wall Hydrants and Post Hydrants:

a. Ancon, Inc. b. Jones Manufacturing Co., Inc. c. Josam Co. d. Smith by Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. Div., Smith Industries, Inc. e. Wade Div., Tyler Pipe. f. Watts Regulator Co. g. Woodford Manufacturing Co. Div., WCM Industries, Inc. h. Zurn by Hydromechanics Div., Zurn Industries, Inc.

8. Sanitary Hydrants:

Shafter-Wasco Irrigation District - Office-#Ol-Z67

\ ,)

PLUMBING SPECIAL TI

a. Murdock, Inc.

9. Water Hammer Arresters:

a. Amtrol, Inc. b. Ancon, Inc. c. Jones Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Josam Co. e. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. f. Smith by Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. Div., Smith Industries, Inc. g. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc. h. Wade Div., Tyler Pipe. i. Watts Regulator Co. j. Zurn by Hydromechanics Div., Zurn Industries, Inc.

10. Trap Seal Primer Valves:

a. Ancon, Inc. b. Jones Manufacturing Co., Inc. c. Josam Co. d. Smith by Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. Div., Smith Industries, Inc. e. Wade Div., Tyler Pipe. f. Watts Regulator Co. g. Zurn by Hydromechanics Div., Zurn Industries, Inc.

11. Backwater Valves:

a. Ancon, Inc. b. Josam Co. c. Smith by Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. Div., Smith Industries, Inc.· d. Zurn by Hydromechanics Div., Zurn Industries Inc.

12. Sleeve Penetration Systems:

a. Proset Systems, Inc.

2.2 WATER METERS

A. General: Register in gallons, except where registration in cubic feet is indicated.

B. Water Meters: AWWA C700, displacement (disc) type, with bronze main case.

2.3 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. General: ASSE Standard, backflow preventers, of size indicated for maximum flow rate indicated and maximum pressure loss indicated.

1. Working Pressure: 150 psig minimum except where indicated otherwise. 2. 2 Inches and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends. 3. 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: Bronze, cast-iron, steel, or stainless-steel body with

lSCO Irrigation District- Office - #01-267 Shaft!


flanged ends.

a. Interior Lining: FDA-approved epoxy coating, for backflow preventers having cast-iron or steel body.

4. Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials. 5. Exterior Finish: Polished chrome plate when used in chrome-plated piping

system. 6. Strainer on inlet, where strainer is indicated.

B. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001, with floating disc and atmospheric vent.

C. Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011, nickel plated, with nonremovable and manual drain features, and ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose threads on outlet. Units attached to rough-bronze-finish hose connections may be rough bronze.

D. Intermediate Atmospheric-Vent Backflow Preventers: ASSE 10l2, consisting of inlet screen and 2 independent check valves with intermediate atmospheric vent for continuous pressure application.

E. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventer: ASSE 1013, consisting of (OS&Y) gate valves on inlet and outlet and strainer on inlet. Include test cocks and pressure-differential relief valve having ASME A112.1.2 air-gap fitting located between 2 positive-seating check valves for continuous pressure application.

1. Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.

F. Double-Check Backflow Prevention Assemblies: ASSE 1015, consisting of shutoff valves on inlet and outlet and strainer on inlet. Include test cocks with 2 positive-seating check valves for continuous pressure application.


G. Antisiphon, Pressure-Type Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1020, consisting of valves, spring-loaded check valve, and spring-loaded floating disc. Include test cocks and atmospheric vent for continuous pressure application.


H. Double-Check Detector Assembly Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1048, FM approved or UL listed, consisting of OS&Y gate valves on inlet and outlet and strainer on inlet. Include 2 positive-seating check valves and test cocks, and bypass with displacement-type water meter, valves, and double-check backflow preventer, for continuous pressure application.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Piping specialties such as escutcheons, dielectric fittings, sleeves, and sleeve seals are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."


PLUMBING SPECIAL TI

B. Strainers: Y pattern, except where otherwise indicated, full size of connecting piping. Include Type 304 stainless-steel screens with 3/ 64-inch perforations except where other screens are indicated.

1. Pressure Rating: 125-psig minimum steam working pressure except where otherwise indicated.

2. Sizes 2 Inches and Smaller: Bronze body, with female threaded ends. 3. Sizes 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: Cast-iron body, with interior FDA-approved epoxy

coating and flanged ends. 4. Y -Type Strainers: Screwed screen retainer with centered blowdown.

a. Drain: Pipe plug. b. Drain: Factory- or field-installed, hose-end drain valve.

5. T -Type Strainers: Malleable-iron or ductile-iron body with grooved ends; access end cap with drain plug and access coupling with EDPM gasket.

6. Basket-Type Strainers: Bolted flange or clamp cover, and basket having lift-out handle.

a. Simplex Type: Single unit, with 1 basket. b. Duplex Type: Double unit, with bronze or stainless-steel diverter valve and

2 baskets. c. Drain: Pipe plug. d. Drain: Factory- or field-installed hose-end, drain valve.

C. Hose Bibbs: Bronze body, with renewable composition disc, 1/2- or 3/4-inch threaded or solder-joint inlet. Provide ASME Bl.20.7 garden-hose threads on outlet and integral or field-installed, nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum breaker.

1. Finish: Rough brass. 2. Finish: Chrome or nickel plated. 3. Operation: Wheel handle. 4. Operation: Operating key (handle). Provide 1 operating key.

D. Wall Hydrants: ASME A112.21.3M, nonfreeze, key operation. Provide 1 operating key.

1. Inlet: 3/4- or i-inch threaded or solder joint. 2. Outlet: ASME Bl.20.7 garden-hose threads, and integral or field-installed,

nonremovable and drainable hose-connection vacuum breaker having ASME Bl.20.7 garden-hose threads on outlet.

3. Type: Projecting. 4. Type: Recessed. 5. Finish: Rough bronze. 6. Finish: Polished bronze. 7. Finish: Nickel bronze.

E. Wall Hydrants: ASME A112.21.3M or ASSE 1019, nonfreeze, automatic draining, antibackflow type, key operation, with 3/4- or i-inch threaded or solder-joint inlet, and ASME Bl.20.7 garden-hose threads on outlet. Provide 1 operating key.

lSCO Irrigation District- Office - #01-267 Shaft(


1. Type: Projecting. Z. Type: Recessed. 3. Finish: Rough bronze. 4. Finish: Polished bronze. 5. Finish: Nickel bronze.

F. Wall Hydrants: ASME A11Z.Z1.3M, projecting, automatic-draining, antibackflow type, key operation. Provide 1 operating key. 1. Inlet: 3/4- or l-inch threaded or solder-joint. Z. Outlet: ASME Bl.Z0.7 garden-hose threads. 3. Finish: Rough bronze. 4. Finish: Polished bronze. 5. Finish: Nickel bronze.

G. Hose-End, Drain Valves: 3/4-inch ball valve, rated for 400 psig WOG. Include Z-piece bronze body conforming to ASTM B 6Z, standard port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable "TFE" seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle.

1. Inlet: Solder-joint or threaded. Z. Outlet: Short-threaded nipple with ASME Bl.Z0.7 garden-hose thread and cap. 3. Hose-End, Drain Valve Option: MSS SP-80, gate valve, Class lZS, ASTM B 6Z body,

with 3/4-inch solder-joint or threaded inlet and ASME Bl.Z0.7 garden-hose thread outlet and cap. Hose bibbs are prohibited for this application.

4. Fire-Hose-End Drain Valve Option: UL 668, l-l/Z-inch, bronze body, 90-degree angle or straightway pattern hose valve, rated for 17S-psig minimum working pressure.

a. Male Outlet Threads: Conform to NFPA 1963 and local fire department standards and complete with attached chain and cap.

1) Z-l/Z-inch valves with Z-l/Z- by l-l/Z-inch adapter and attached chain and cap may be provided instead of l-l/Z-inch valves.

H. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: Ball valve or MSS SP-80 gate valve, rated for ZOO psig WOG minimum, ASTM B 6Z bronze body, with 1/8-inch side drain outlet and cap.

I. Water Hammer Arresters: ASME A11Z.Z6.1M, ASSE 1010, or PDI WH-Z01, bellows or piston type with pressurized cushioning chamber. Sizes are based on water-supply fixture units, ASME A11Z.Z6.1M sizes "A" through "F" and PDI WH-ZOl sizes "A" through "F."

J. Trap Seal Primer Valves: ASSE 1018, water-supply-fed type, with the following characteristics:

1. lZS-psig minimum working pressure. Z. Bronze body with atmospheric-vented drain chamber. 3. Inlet and Outlet Connections: liZ-inch threaded, union, or solder joint. 4. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: liZ-inch threaded or solder joint. 5. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not


PLUMBING SPECIAL TI

chrome finished.

K. Drain Outlet, Backwater Valves: Cast-iron or bronze body, with removable ball float, threaded inlet, and threaded or spigot outlet.

L. Drainage-Type Basket Strainers: Non-pressure rated, cast-iron or coated-steel body, with bolted flange or clamp cover, drain with plug.

1. Basket: Bronze or stainless steel with 1/8- or 3/16-inch diameter holes and lift-out handle.

2. Female threaded ends for sizes 2 inches and smaller, and flanged ends for sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger.

M. Stack Flashing Fittings: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for termination of roofing membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extension of vent pipe.

N. Vent Caps: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. Include vented hood and set-screws to secure to vent pipe.

O. Vent Terminals: Commercially manufactured, shop-fabricated or field-fabricated, frost-proof assembly constructed of galvanized steel, copper, or lead-coated copper. Size to provide 1-inch enclosed air space between outside of pipe and inside of flashing collar extension, with counterflashing, as indicated.

P. Roof Flashing Assemblies: Manufactured assembly consisting of 4-psf lead flashing collar with boot and skirt extending at least 8 inches from pipe, with galvanized steel boot reinforcement and counterflashing fitting.

1. Option 1: Open top. 2. Option 2: Low-silhouette model with vandal-proof vent cap. 3. Option 3: Extended model with field-installed, vandal-proof vent cap.

2.5 CLEANOUTS

A. General: Size cleanouts as indicated on drawings, or where not indicated, same size as connected drainage piping. Cleanouts larger than 4 inches are not required except where indicated.

B. Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M, cast-iron body with straight threads and gasket seal or taper threads for plug, flashing flange and clamping ring, and a brass closure plug. Clean outs for installation in floors not having· membrane waterproofing may be furnished without clamping ring. See Product Data Sheet at end of Part 3 of this Section for deck plate shape, top-loading classification, access cover, finish, and other specific features.

C. Plastic Clean outs: Fabricate units of plastic pipe and fittings, with removable threaded plastic closure plug. See Product Data Sheet at end of Part 3 of this Section for separate deck plate, top-loading classification, and finish, when required; for access covers when required; and other specific features.

lSCO Irrigation District - Office - #01-267 Shaft!


D. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, cleanouts that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in each Plumbing Specialties Product Data Sheet at end of this Section.

E. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified in each Plumbing Specialties Product Data Sheet at end of this Section.

2.6 FLOOR DRAINS

A. General: Size outlets as indicated on Product Data Sheet or drawings.

B. Floor Drains: ASME Al12.21.1M, cast-iron body, with seepage flange and clamping device. Floor drains for installation in floors not having membrane waterproofing may have seepage flange without clamping device. Floor drains for use as area drains in exterior slab on grade may be furnished with anchor flange instead of seepage flange and clamping device. See Product Data Sheet at end of Part 3 of this Section for shape, dimensions, strainer and body top finish, top-loading classification, sump size, and specific features.

C. Trench Drains: ASME A112.21.1M, cast-iron body, with seepage flange and clamping device. Trench drains for installation in floors not having membrane waterproofing may have seepage flange without clamping device. Trench drains for use as area drains in exterior slab on grade may be furnished with anchor flange or other anchoring device instead of seepage flange and clamping device. See Product Data Sheet at end of Part 3 of this Section for shape, dimensions, grate material, grate and body top finish, top-loading classification, sump size, number of outlets, and specific features.

D. Inlet Fittings: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap seal primer valve connection.

E. Air Gap Fittings: ASME A112.1:2, cast iron or cast bronze, with fixed air gap, inlet for drain pipe or tube, and threaded or spigot outlet.

F. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, floor drains that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in each Plumbing Specialties Product Data Sheet at end of this Section.

G. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified in each Plumbing Specialties Product Data Sheet at end of this Section.

2.7 ROOF DRAINS

A. General: Size outlet as indicated on Product Data Sheet or drawings.

B. Roof Drains: ASME Al12.21.2M, cast-iron body, with combination flashing ring and gravel stop, cast-iron dome except where other dome material is specified, extension collars, underdeck clamp, and sump receiver. Roof drains for installation in cast-in-place concrete decks may be furnished without underdeck clamp and sump receiver. See Product Data Sheet at end of Part 3 of this Section for dimensions, sump size, dome

Shafter-Wasco Irrigation District - Office-#O 1-2 6 7

"

" J

PLUMBING SPECIAL TI

material, and specific features.

C. Plastic Roof Drains: ASME Al12.21.2M standard design and pattern except for material. See Product Data Sheet at end of Part 3 of this Section for specific features.

D. Expansion Joints: ASME A112.21.1M, assembly for roof drain outlet, consisting of cast-iron body, with bronze sleeve, packing gland, and packing, of size and end types corresponding to connected piping.

1. Size: Same as roof drain outlet when connected to roof drain and same as connected piping when installed in piping.

E. Downspout Boots: ASTM A 48, gray-iron casting, with 4-inch round outlet; shop-applied, bituminous coating; and inlet size indicated.

F. Downspout Nozzles: Cast-bronze body with threaded inlet for pipe size indicated, and cast-bronze wall flange with mounting holes.

1. Finish: Polished bronze. 2. Finish: Nickel bronze.

G. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, roof drains that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in each Plumbing Specialties Product Data Sheet at end of this Section.

H. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified in each Plumbing Specialties Product Data Sheet at end of this Section.

2.8 INTERCEPTORS

A. Solids Interceptors: Features include settlement chambers; baffles; removable basket, strainer, screens, or other means of cleaning; and removable cover. See Product Data Sheet at the end of Part 3 of this Section.

1. Material: Cast iron, steel, stainless steel, or bronze, as indicated.

B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, interceptors that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in each Plumbing Specialties Product Data Sheet at end of this Section.

C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified in each Plumbing Specialties Product Data Sheet at end of this Section.

2.9 SLEEVE PENETRATION SYSTEMS

A. Description: UL 1479, through-penetration firestop assembly consisting of sleeve and stack fitting with firestopping plug.

1. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral nailing flange on 1 end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs.

1SCO Irrigation District - Office - #01-267 Shaft!

Section 15430 - of17 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

2.10

A.

B.

2. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48, cast-iron, hubless-pattern, wye branch stack fitting with neoprene 0 ring at base and cast-iron plug in thermal-release harness in branch. Include PVC protective cap for plug.

a. Special Coating: Include corrosion-resistant interior coating on fittings for plastic chemical waste and vent stacks.

FLASHING MATERIALS

Lead: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper-bearing sheet, at least 4 psf (0.0625-inch thick) for general use, and at least 6 psf (0.0937-inch thick) for burning (welding), except as otherwise indicated.

Elastic Membrane: Nonreinforced flexible, black elastic, sheet, 50 to 65-mils thick and complying with the following:

1. Shore A Hardness: ASTM D 2240, 50 to 70. 2. Tensile Strength: ASTM D 412,1200 psi. 3. Tear Resistance: ASTM D 624, Die C, 20 lb per linear inch. 4. Ultimate Elongation: ASTM D 412, 250 percent. 5. Low-Temperature Brittleness: ASTM D 746, minus 30 deg F (minus 35 deg C). 6. Resistance to Ozone Aging: ASTM D 1149, no cracks for 10 percent elongated

sample for 100 hours in 50-mPa ozone at 104 deg F (70 deg C). 7. Resistance to Heat Aging: ASTM D 573, maximum hardness increase of 15 points,

elongation reduction of 40 percent, and tensile strength reduction of 30 percent, for 70 hours at 212 deg F (100 deg C).

C. Copper: ASTM B 370, sheet, 16 oz. per sq. ft. (0.0216-inch thick) except as otherwise indicated.

1. General Use: Temper HOO (formerly cold-rolled). 2. Forming Use: Temper 060 (formerly soft).

D. Zinc-Coated Steel: ASTM A 526, sheet, with 0.20 percent copper, G90 hot-dip galvanized, mill phosphatized where indicated for painting; 0.0359-inch thick (20 gage) except as otherwise indicated.

E. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.

F. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units as required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.

G. Solder: ASTM B 32, Alloy Sn50.

H. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-12, solvent type, bituminous mastic.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF WATER METER


PLUMBING SPECIAL TI

A. Install water meter according to utility company's written installation instructions and requirements.

8. Size meter and arrange piping and specialties to comply with utility company's requirements.

C. Set meter on 3000-psi minimum, Portland cement mix concrete pad, as indicated. Refer to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for requirements for formwork, reinforcement, and concrete.

D. Mount meter on wall brackets or meter yoke, as indicated.

E. Mount remote-registration devices in locations indicated. Drill hole in exterior wall and install connecting wire. Seal hole with single-part, neutral-curing silicone sealant specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

3.2 ROUGHING-IN FOR WATER METER

A. Install roughing-in piping and specialties for water meter installation according to utility company's instructions and requirements.

3.3 PIPING SPECIALTY INSTALLATION

A. Install backflow preventers of type, size, and capacity indicated, at each water supply connection to mechanical equipment and systems, and to other equipment and systems as indicated. Comply with plumbing code and authority having jurisdiction. Locate in same room as equipment being connected. Install air-gap fitting on units having atmospheric vent connection and pipe relief outlet drain to nearest floor drain. Do not install bypass around backflow preventer.

8. Install pressure-regulating valves with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and balance cock bypass. Install pressure gage on valve outlet and install valved bypass where indicated.

C. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure-regulating valve, and solenoid valve, and where indicated.

D. Install hose bibbs with integral or field-installed vacuum breaker.

E. Install wall hydrants with integral or field-installed vacuum breaker.

F. Install trap seal primer valves with valve outlet pipIng pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1/8 inch per foot (1 percent) and connect to floor drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.

G. Install backwater valves in building drain piping as indicated. For interior installation, provide cleanout deck plate (cover) flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover and of adequate size to remove valve cover for service.

H. Install expansion joints on vertical risers, stacks, and conductors as indicated.

is co Irrigation District - Office - #01-267 Shaft!


I. Install cleanouts in above-ground piping and building drain piping as indicated, and where not indicated, according to the following:

1. Size same as drainage piping up to 4-inch size. Use 4-inch size for larger drainage piping except where larger size cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping 4 inches and smaller and 100

feet for larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil or waste stack

J. Install cleanout deck plates (covers), of types indicated, with top flush with finished floor, for floor cleanouts for piping below floors.

K. Install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall, for cleanouts located in concealed piping.

L. Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and cleanout passing through floors having waterproof membrane.

M. Install vent flashing sleeves on stacks passing through roof. Secure over stack flashing according to the manufacturer's written instructions.

N. Install frost-proof vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain l-inch clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate.

3.4 FLOOR DRAIN INSTALLATION

A. Install floor drains according to manufacturer's written instructions, in locations indicated.

B. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained, or as indicated. Set tops of drains flush with finished floor.

C. Set drain elevation depressed below finished slab elevation as listed below to provide proper floor slope to drain:

1. S-Foot Drain Area Radius: 1/2-inch depression. 2. 10-Foot Drain Area Radius: 3/4-inch depression. 3. lS-Foot Drain Area Radius: l-inch depression. 4. 20-Foot Drain Area Radius: 1-1/4-inch depression. 5. 2S-Foot Drain Area Radius: 1-1/2-inch depression.

D. Trap drains connected to sanitary building drain.

E. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated.

F. Position drains for easy accessibility and maintenance.


PLUMBING SPECIAL TI

3.5 ROOF DRAIN INSTALLATION

A. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas, according to the roof membrane manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Install drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between roof drain and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated.

C. Position roof drains for easy accessibility and maintenance.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Supply Runouts to Fixtures: Install hot- and cold-water supply piping runouts to fixtures of sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

B. Drainage Runouts to Fixtures: Provide drainage and vent piping runouts to plumbing fixtures and drains, with approved trap, of sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

C. Locate drainage piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures or drains.

D. Interceptor Connections: Connect piping, flow control fittings, and accessories as indicated.

1. Grease Interceptors: Connect inlet and outlet to unit, and flow control fitting and vent to unit inlet piping. Install valve on outlet of automatic drawoff type unit.

2. Grease Recovery Units: Connect inlet, outlet, and vent piping; controls; electric power; and factory-furnished accessories.

3. Oil Interceptors: Connect inlet, outlet, vent, and gravity drawoff piping to unit; flow control fitting and vent on unit inlet piping; and gravity drawoff and suction piping to oil storage tank·

4. Solids Interceptors: Connect inlet and outlet.

E. Electrical Connections: Power wiring and disconnect switches are specified in Division 16.

1. Grounding: Connect unit components to ground according to the National Electrical Code and Division 16 Section "Grounding."

3.7 FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Provide flashing manufactured in a single piece except where large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required.

B. Install 4-psf lead flashing or 16-oz.-per sq. ft. copper, except when another weight or material is specified.

c. Install6-psflead flashing or heavier where burning (welding) oflead sheets is required.

1SCO Irrigation District - Office - #01-267 Shaft(


D. Solder joints of copper sheets where required.

E. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with membrane waterproofing.

1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum sleeve length of 10 inches, and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.

2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve.

3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around specialty.

F. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.

G. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.

H. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counter flashing or commercially made flashing fittings, according to Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal."

I. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe or secure flashing into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.

J. Fabricate and install lead sheet flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes as indicated. Install drain connection when indicated.

K. Fabricate and install copper sheet flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes as indicated. Install drain connection when indicated.

L. Fabricate and install galvanized-steel sheet flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes as indicated. Install drain connection when indicated.

M. Fabricate and install elastic-membrane sheet flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes as indicated. Install drain connection when indicated.

3.8 COMMISSIONING

A. Preparation: Perform the following checks before start-up:

1. Systems tests are complete. 2. Damaged and defective specialties and accessories have been replaced or repaired. 3. There is clear space for servicing of specialties.

B. Before operating systems, perform these steps:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open valves to full open position. 3. Remove and clean strainers. 4. Verify drainage and vent piping are clear of obstructions. Flush with water until

clear.

Shafter-Wasco Irrigation District - Dffice-#Ol-267

PLUMBING SPECIAL Tl

c )

C. Starting Procedures: Follow manufacturer's written procedures. If no procedures are prescribed by manufacturer, proceed as follows:

1. Energize circuits for grease recovery units. Start and run units through complete sequence of operations.

3.9 ADJUSTING

A.

3.10

A.

B.

Adjust operation and correct deficiencies discovered during commissioning.

PROTECTION

Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work

Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or when work stops.

END OF SECTION 15430

lSCO Irrigation District- Office - #01-267 Shaft!

\

.. )

/ \

SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1- GENERAL


Section 15440 - Page 1 of 13 PLUMBING FIXTURES

A. Drawings and general prOVISIOns of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Requirements of the following Division 15 Sections apply to this Section:

1. "Basic Mechanical Requirements." 2. "Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment." 3. "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." 4. "Basic Piping Materials and Methods."

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes plumbing fixtures and trim, fittings, and accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports associated with plumbing fixtures.

B. Products furnished but not installed under this Section include:

1.

2.

Plumbing fittings (including faucets) and piping indicated, for fixtures, appliances, appurtenances, and equipment provided by Owner. Plumbing fittings (including faucets) and piping indicated, for fixtures, appliances, appurtenances, and equipment specified in other sections.

C. Products installed but not furnished under this Section include:

1. Owner-supplied fixtures, as indicated. 2. Accessories, appliances, appurtenances, and equipment specified in other sections,

requiring plumbing services or fixture-related devices, as indicated.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Accessible: Describes a plumbing fixture, building, facility, or portion thereof that can be approached, entered, and used by physically handicapped people.

B. Accessory: Device that adds effectiveness, convenience, or improved appearance to a fixture but is not essential to its operation.

C. Appliance: Device or machine designed and intended to perform a specific function.

D. Appurtenance: Device or assembly designed to perform some useful function when attached to or used with a fixture.

E. Equipment: Device used with plumbing fixtures or plumbing systems to perform a certain function for plumbing fixtures but that is not part of the fixture.

Shafter-Wasco Irrigation District - Office -#01-267


F. Fitting: Fitting installed on or attached to a fixture to control the flow of water into or out of the fixture.

G. Fixture: Installed receptor connected to the water distribution system, that receives and makes available potable water and discharges the used liquid or liquid-borne wastes directly or indirectly into the drainage system. The term "Fixture" means the actual receptor, except when used in a general application where terms "Fixture" and "Plumbing Fixture" include associated trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, support, and equipment.

H. Roughing-In: Installation of piping and support for the fixture prior to the actual installation of the fixture.

I. Support: Device normally concealed in building construction, for supporting and securing plumbing fixtures to walls and structural members. Supports for urinals, lavatories, and sinks are made in types suitable for fixture construction and the mounting required. Categories of supports are:

1. Carrier: Floor-mounted support for wall-mounted water closet, and support fixed to wall construction for wall-hung fixture.

2. Chair Carrier: Support for wall-hung fixture, having steel pipe uprights that transfer weight to the floor.

J. Trim: Hardware and miscellaneous parts, specific to a fixture and normally supplied with it required to complete fixture assembly and installation.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data for each type of plumbing fixture specified, including fixture and trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, supports, construction details, dimensions of components, and finishes.

C. Wiring diagrams for field-installed wiring of electrically operated units.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of ANSI StandardA117.1, "Buildings and Facilities -- Providing Accessibility and Useability for Physically Handicapped People," and Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act, 1968," with respect to plumbing fixtures for the physically handicapped.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of ATBCB (Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board) "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS) - 1985-494-187" with respect to plumbing fixtures for the physically handicapped.

C. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.


( I

I

/


1. The terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be as defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.


D. Design Concept: The drawings indicate types of plumbing fixtures and are based on the specific descriptions, manufacturers, models, and numbers indicated. Plumbing fixtures having equal performance characteristics by other manufacturers may be considered provided that deviations in dimensions, operation, color or finish, or other characteristics are minor and do not change the design concept or intended performance as judged by the Architect. Burden of proof for equality of plumbing fixtures is on the proposer.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver plumbing fixtures in manufacturer's protective packing, crating, and covering.

B. Store plumbing fixtures on elevated platforms in a dry location.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below matching products installed, packaged with protective covering for storage, and identified with labels clearly describing contents.

1.

2.

3.

Faucet Washers and O-rings: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 10 percent of amount of each installed. Faucet Cartridges and O-rings: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 5 percent of amount of each installed. Flushometer Repair Kits: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 10 percent of amount of each flushometer installed.

4. Provide a hinged-top wood or metal box, or individual metal boxes, having a separate compartment for each type and size of above extra materials.

5. Water Closet Tank Repair Kits: Furnish quantity of identical flush valve units not less than 5 percent of amount of each type installed.

6. Toilet Seats: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 5 percent of amount of each type toilet seat installed.

7. Filter Cartridges: Furnish quantity of identical filter cartridges not less than 50 percent of amount of each type and size installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subjectto compliance with requirements, provide products in each category, by one of the following listed for that category:



1. Water Closets:

a. American Standard, Inc. b. Barclay Products Ltd. c. Briggs Div.; Briggs Industries, Inc. d. Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products. e. Eljer; A Household International Co. f. Gerber Plumbing Fixture Corp. g. Kohler Co. h. Mansfield Plumbing Products, Inc. i. Microphor, Inc. j. Universal-Rundle Corp. k Water Control International, Inc.

2. Urinals:

a. American Standard, Inc. b. Briggs Div.; Briggs Industries, Inc. c. Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products. d. Eljer; A Household International Co. e. Gerber Plumbing Fixture Corp. f. Kohler Co. g. Mansfield Plumbing Products, Inc. h. Universal-Rundle Corp. i. Urinette, Inc.

3. Lavatories:

a. Acorn Engineering Co. b. American Standard, Inc. c. Barclay Products Ltd. d. Briggs Div.; Briggs Industries, Inc. e. Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products. f. Eljer; A Household International Co. g. Gerber Plumbing Fixture Corp. h. International Sanitary Ware Manufacturing Co. i. Just Manufacturing Co. j. Kohler Co. k Mansfield Plumbing Products, Inc. 1. Universal-Rundle Corp.

4. Sinks:

a. American Standard, Inc. b. Briggs Div.; Briggs Industries, Inc. c. Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products. d. Eljer; A Household International Co. e. Elkay Manufacturing Co. f. Just Manufacturing Co. g. Kohler Co.


( .. h. i.

Moen Group; Stanadyne Corp. Universal-Rundle Corp.

5. Service Sinks:

a. Acorn Engineering Co. b. American Standard, Inc. c. Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products. d. Eljer; A Household International Co. e. Elkay Manufacturing Co. f. Just Manufacturing Co. g. Kohler Co. h. Universal-Rundle Corp.

6. Mop Basins:

a. Aqua Glass Corp. b. Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products. c. Florestone Products Co., Inc. d. Stern-Williams Co., Inc. e. Swan Corp.

7. Bath Tubs:

a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i.

American Standard, Inc. Aqua Glass Corp. Aquarius Div.; Briggs Industries, Inc. Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products. Eljer; A Household International Co. Florestone Products Co., Inc. Kohler Co. Swan Corp. Universal-Rundle Corp.

8. Showers:

a. Acorn Engineering Co. b. American Standard, Inc. c. Aqua Glass Corp. d. Aquarius Div.; Briggs Industries, Inc. e. Bradley Corp. f. Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products. g. Eljer; A Household International Co. h. Kohler Co. L Swan Corp. j. Universal-Rundle Corp.

9. Drinking Fountains:

a. American Standard, Inc.




b. Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products. c. Eljer; A Household International Co. d. Filtrine Manufacturing Co. e. Halsey Taylor; A Household International Co. f. Haws Drinking Faucet Co. g. Kohler Co.

10. Wash Fountains:

a. Acorn Engineering Co. b. Bradley Corp. c. International Sanitary Ware Manufacturing Co.

11. Outlet Boxes:

a. Guy Gray Manufacturing Co., Inc. b. Symmons Industries, Inc.

12. Emergency Equipment:

a. Bradley Corp. b. Guardian Equipment. c. Haws Drinking Faucet Co. d. Speakman Co. e. Water Saver Faucet Co. f. Western Drinking Fountains; Sunroc Corp.

13. Toilet Seats:

a. Bemis Mfg. Co. b. Beneke Div.; Sanderson Plumbing Products, Inc. c. Church Seat Co. d. Kohler Co. e. Olsonite Corp. f. Sperzel Industries, Inc.

14. Flushometers:

a. Cambridge Brass Div.; EMCO Products; Masco Corp. b. Coyne & Delany Co. c. Sloan Valve Co. d. Watrous Flush Valve Co.; Polaris Industries. e. Zurn'Industries, Inc.; Flush Valve Operations.

15. Residential/Light Commercial Nonmetal Underbody Faucets:

a. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures Corp. b. Moen Group; Stanadyne Corp. c. Nibco, Inc. d. Sterling Plumbing Group, Inc.


( e. Valley Faucets Div.; U.S. Brass.

16. Pressure Balance Bath/Shower Faucets:

a. American Standard, Inc. b. Bradley Corp. c. Chicago Faucet Co. d. Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products. e. Delta Faucet Co.; Div. of Masco Corp. f. Eljer; A Household International Co. g. Elkay Manufacturing Co. h. Grohe America, Inc. i. Kohler Co. j. Lawler Manufacturing Co., Inc. k. Leonard Valve Co. 1. Moen Group; Stanadyne Corp. m. Nibco, Inc.


n. Powers Process Controls; A Unit of Mark Controls Corp. o. Price Pfister, Inc. p. Royal Brass Mfg. Co. q. Speakman Co. r. Symmons Industries, Inc. s. Valley Faucets Div.; U.S. Brass.

17. Thermostatic Mixing Valve Bath/Shower Faucets:

a. Bradley Corp. b. Grohe America, Inc. c. Lawler Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Leonard Valve Co. e. Powers Process Controls; A Unit of Mark Controls Corp. f. Symmons Industries, Inc. g. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.

18. Shower Receptors:

a. Aqua Glass Corp. b. Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products. c. Florestone Products Co., Inc. d. Lyons Industries, Inc. e. Stern-Williams Co., Inc. f. Swan Corp.

19. Sensor-Operated Faucets and Devices:

a. Acorn Engineering Co. b. Bradley Corp. c. Coyne & Delany Co. d. DAL American, Inc. e. International Sanitary Ware Manufacturing Co.



f. Sloan Valve Co. g. Speakman Co.

20. Miscellaneous Fittings (Except Faucets):

a. Aquaflo Corp. b. Beaton & Corbin Mfg. Co. c. Brass Craft Subsidiary; Masco Co. d. Bridgeport Plumbing Products, Inc. e. Central Brass Manufacturing Co. f. Chicago Faucet Co. g. Connecticut Stamping & Bending Co. h. Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products. i. Eljer; A Household International Co. j. Kohler Co. k. McGuire Manufacturing Co., Inc. 1. Price Pfister, Inc. m. Royal Brass Mfg. Co. n. Sanitary-Dash Manufacturing Co., Inc. o. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc. p. Teledyne Ansonia.

21. Supports:

a. Ancon, Inc. b. Josam Co. c. Smith (Jay R) Mfg. Co. d. Wade Div.; Tyler Pipe. e. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div.

2.2 PLUMBING FIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Provide plumbing fixtures and trim, fittings, other components, and supports as specified in "Plumbing Fixture Data Sheets" atthe end of Part 3 of this Section.

2.3 FITTINGS, EXCEPT FAUCETS

A. Fittings General: Unless otherwise specified, provide fittings fabricated of brass, with a polished chrome plated finish.

B. Lavatory Supplies and Stops, Type 1: Loose-key angle stop, having 1/2-inch NPS inlet with wall flange and 3/8-inch by 12-inch flexible tubing riser outlet.

2.4 FLUSHOMETERS

A. Provide flushometers compatible with fixtures, with features and of consumption indicated.

B. Construction: Cast-brass body, brass or copper pipe or tubing inlet with wall flange and tailpiece with spud, screwdriver check stop, vacuum breaker, and brass lever handle actuation except where other variations are specified. Type shall be diaphragm operation


except where other type is specified.


C. Finish: Exposed metal parts shall be polished chrome-plated, except components installed in a concealed location may be rough brass or unfinished.

D. Water Closet Flushometers, Type 1: Furnish with following features.

9 Non-hold-open feature. 10 Wheel handle stop. 11 Metal push button actuation. 12 Seat bumper on stop. 13 Hydraulic push-button actuator. 14 Bedpan washer diverter valve, spray head, and support. 15 Trap primer connection. 16 Furnish flushometers with factory-set or field-adjusted maximum water consumption

per cycle:

a. Consumption: 3.0 gallons per flushing cycle.

E. Urinal Flushometers, Type 1: Furnish with following features.

17 Non-hold-open feature. 18 Wheel handle stop. 19 Metal push-button actuation. 20 Hydraulic push-button actuator. 21 Trap primer connection. 22 Sensor operation. 23 Automatic flushing system. 24 Furnish flushometers with factory-set or field-adjusted maximum water consumption

per cycle:

a. Consumption: 3.0 gallons per flushing cycle. b. Consumption: 1.5 gallons per flushing cycle. c. Consumption: 1.0 gallons per flushing cycle.

2.5 TOILET SEATS

A. General: Provide toilet seats compatible with water closets, and of type, color, and features indicated.

B. Toilet Seats, Type 1: Extra heavy-duty, commercial/industrial type, elongated, open front, solid plastic, with check hinge.

2.6 SHOWER RECEPTORS

A. Shower Receptors: Provide shower receptors of shape, dimensions, color, and other characteristics specified on Shower Data Sheet. Where data is not complete, provide receptors with characteristics compatible with enclosures.

25 Material: Terrazzo.



26 Material: Plastic (molded stone).

2.7 PLUMBING FIXTURE SUPPORTS

A. Supports: ASME A112.6.1M, categories and types as required for wall-hanging fixtures specified, and wall reinforcement.

B. Support categories are:

27 Carriers: Supports for wall-hanging water closets and fixtures supported from wall construction. Water closet carriers shall have an additional faceplate and coupling when used for wide pipe spaces. Provide tiling frame or setting gage with carriers for wall-hanging water closets.

28 Chair Carriers: Supports with steel pipe uprights for wall-hanging fixtures. Urinal chair carriers shall have bearing plates.

29 Chair Carriers, Heavy Duty: Supports with rectangular steel uprights for wall-hanging fixtures.

30 Reinforcement: 2-inch by 4-inch wood blocking between studs or 1/4-inch by 6-inch steel plates attached to studs, in wall construction, to secure floor-mounted and special fixtures to wall.

C. Support Types: Provide support of category specified, of type having features required to match fixture.

D. Provide supports specified as part of fixture description, in lieu of category and type requirements above.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for potable cold water and hot water supplies and soil, waste, and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installing fixtures.

B. Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.

C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. Install plumbing fixtures and specified components, in accordance with designations and locations indicated on Drawings.

B. Install supports for plumbing fixtures in accordance with categories indicated, and of type required:

1. Carriers for following fixtures:

a. Wall-hanging water closets.

Shafter-Wasco Irrigation District - Office -#01-2 6 7


b. Wall-hanging fixtures supported from wall construction.

2. Chair carriers for the following fixtures:

a. Wall-hanging urinals. b. Wall-hanging lavatories and sinks. c. Wall-hanging drinking fountains and electric water coolers.

31. Heavy-duty chair carriers for the following fixtures:

a. Accessible lavatories. b. Fixtures where specified.

4. Reinforcement for the following fixtures:

c. Floor-mounted lavatories required to be secured to wall. d. Floor-mounted sinks required to be secured to wall. e. Recessed, box-mounted electric water coolers.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING FIXTURES

A. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb, in accordance with fixture manufacturers' written installation instructions, roughing-in drawings, and referenced standards.

B. Install floor-mounted, floor-outlet water closets with closet flanges and gasket seals.

C. Install floor-mounted, back-outlet water closets with fittings and gasket seals.

D. Install wall-hanging, back-outlet water closets with support manufacturer's tiling frame or setting gage.

E. Install wall-hanging, back-outlet. urinals with gasket seals.

F. Fasten wall-hanging plumbing fixtures securely to supports attached to building substrate when supports are specified, and to building wall construction where no support is indicated.

G. Fasten floor-mounted fixtures and special fixtures having holes for securing fixture to wall construction, to reinforcement built into walls.

H. Fasten wall-mounted fittings to reinforcement built into walls.

I. Fasten counter-mounting-type plumbing fixtures to casework.

J. Secure supplies behind wall or within wall pipe space, providing rigid installation.

K. Set shower receptors and mop basins in leveling bed of cement grout.

L. Install stop valve in an accessible location in each water supply to each fixture.

M. Install trap on fixture outlet except for fixtures having integral trap.



N. Install escutcheons at each wall, floor, and ceiling penetration in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork Use deep pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.

O. Seal fixtures to walls, floors, and counters using a sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant in accordance with sealing requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers." Match sealant color to fixture color.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other sections of Division 15. The Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements:

32 Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and pIpmg systems and plumbing equipment specified in other sections of Division 15.

33 Install piping connections indicated between appliances and equipment specified in other sections, direct connected to plumbing piping systems.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

B. Test fixtures to demonstrate proper operation upon completion of installation and after units are water pressurized. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until all units operate properly.

3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and controls.

B. Operate and adjust disposers, hot water dispensers, and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning units and controls.

C. Adjust water pressure at drinking fountains, electric water coolers, and faucets, shower valves, and flushometers having controls, to provide proper flow and stream.

D. Replace washers ofleaking and dripping faucets and stops.

E. Clean fixtures, fittings, and spout and drain strainers with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods' and materials.

F. Review the data in Operating and Maintenance Manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Project Closeout."

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.


(


B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities, except when approved in writing by the Owner.



NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEMS

SECTION 15488 - NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEMS

PART 1- GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes piping, specialties, and accessories for natural gas systems within the building and to the gas meters.

B. This Section includes piping, specialties, and accessories for natural gas systems within the building and to a point indicated.

C. Approximate values of natural gas that will be supplied for these systems are the following:

1. Heating Value: 1000 Btu/cu. ft. 2. Specific Gravity: 0.6. 3. Service Line Pressure: 15 to 20 psig.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Low-Pressure Natural Gas Piping System: Operating at pressure of 0.5 psig or less.

B. Medium-Pressure Natural Gas Piping System: Operating at pressure greater than 0.5 psig, but not greater than 2 psig.

C. High-Pressure Natural Gas Piping System: Operating at pressure greater than 2 psig, but not greater than 5 psig.

D. Natural Gas Service: Operating at pressure indicated.

E. Gas Main or Distribution Main: Piping to convey gas to individual gas services or other gas mains.

F. Gas Service: Pipe from the gas main or other source to gas point of delivery for the building being served. Piping includes gas service piping, gas valve, service pressure regulator, meter bar or meter support, and gas meter.

G. Gas Delivery Point: Outlet of gas meter or service pressure regulator, or when no gas meter is provided, the gas service valve.

H. Gas Piping System: Pipe within the building that conveys gas from point of delivery to points of usage. Piping includes dielectric fitting and gas valve immediately downstream from point of delivery.


Section 15488 - Page 2 of 12 NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEMS


A. Minimum Working Pressure Ratings: Except where otherwise indicated, the following are minimum pressure requirements.

1. Low-Pressure Natural Gas Piping Systems: 2 psig. 2. Medium-Pressure Natural Gas Piping Systems: 10 psig. 3. High-Pressure Natural Gas Piping Systems: 20 psig. 4. Natural Gas Service: 100 psig.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Product data for each type of natural gas specialty and special-duty valve. Include pressure rating in psig, rated capacity in cu. ft. per hour (CFH), and settings of selected models.

C. Coordination drawings for natural gas piping systems, including required clearances and relationship to other services that serve the same work areas.

D. Maintenance data for natural gas special ties and special-duty valves for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manuals specified in Division 1 Section "Project Closeout."

E. Test reports specified in "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3.


A. Comply with NFPA 54 "National Fuel Gas Code" for gas piping materials and components; installations; and inspection, testing, and purging.

B. Comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code" for electrical connections between wiring and electrically operated control devices.

C. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on equipment made to specified standards.

D. Listing and Labeling: Provide equipment and accessories that are listed and labeled.

E.

1. Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.


Product Options: Natural gas systems equipment, specialties, and accessories are based on specific types, manufacturers, and models indicated. Equipment and other components having equal performance characteristics by other manufacturers may be considered, provided deviations in dimensions, operation, and other characteristics do


) /

I . /


not change design concept or intended performance as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality of products is on the Contractor. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Substitutions."


A Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and legally dispose of liquids from drips in existing gas piping. Handle cautiously to avoid spillage and ignition. Notify the gas supplier. Handle flammable liquids used by the Installer with proper precautions, and do not leave on the premises from end of one day to beginning of next day.

1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A Notification of Interruption of Service: Notify each affected user when gas supply will be turned off.

B. Work Interruptions: Leave gas systems in a safe condition when interruptions in work occur while repairs or alterations are being made to existing gas piping systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:


1. Gas Meters: a. American Meter Co. b. Badger Meter, Inc., Utility Products Div. c. Equimeter, Inc., A BTR Co. d. Lancaster by National Meter Parts, Inc. e. Schlumberger Industries, Gas Div.

2. Meter Bars:

a. Lancaster by National Meter Parts, Inc. b. AY. McDonald Mfg. Co. . c. Rockford-Eclipse Div., Eclipse, Inc. d. Schlumberger Industries, Gas Div.

3. Gas Pressure Regulators:

a. American Meter Co. b. Equimeter, Inc., A BTR Co. c. Fisher Controls.



d. Gas Energy, Inc., Subsid., Brooklyn Union Gas. e. Jordan Valve Div., Richards Industries, Inc. f. Lancaster by National Meter Parts, Inc. g. Maxitrol Co. h. Schlumberger Industries, Gas Div.

4. Low-Pressure Gas Stops:

a. Hammond Valve Corp. b. Jomar International, Ltd. c. Lancaster by National Meter Parts, Inc. d. AY. McDonald Mfg. Co. e. Rockford-Eclipse Div., Eclipse, Inc.

5. Gas Valves, 2 Inches and Smaller:

a. Homestead by Olson Technologies, Inc. b. Lancaster by National Meter Parts, Inc. c. Lunkenheimer Co. d. AY. McDonald Mfg. Co. e. Milliken Valve Co., Inc. f. Mueller Co., A Grinnell Co. g. Mueller Steam Specialty Div., Core Industries, Inc. h. Nordstrum Valves, Inc. i. Resun by J.M. Huber Corp., Equipment Div. j. Rockford-Eclipse Div., Eclipse, Inc.

5. Earthquake-Actuated Automatic Gas Shutoff Valves:

a. Koso by Pacific Seismic Products, Inc. b. Pacific Seismic Products, Inc. c. Quake Defense, Inc .. d. Quake Master, Inc.

2.2 PIPES AND TUBES

A General: Refer to "Pipe Applications" Article in Part 3 for identification of systems where the following materials are used.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Electric-Resistance Welded or Type S, Seamless, Grade B, Schedule 40, black.

2.3 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS

A Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, with threads conforming to ASME Bl.20.1.

B. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, black malleable iron; female pattern; brass-to-iron seat; ground joint.


(..)


C. Cast-Iron Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 125 and 250.

D. Steel Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel, butt-welding type; and ASME B16.11, forged steel.

E. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5.

F. Wrought Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, streamlined pattern.

G. Bronze Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.24.

H. Plastic Pipe Fittings: ASTM D 2513, polyethylene, butt-fusion type; and ASTM D 2683, polyethylene, socket-fusion type.

I. Transition Fittings: Type, material, and end connections to match piping being joined.

2.4 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Common Joining Materials: Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for joining materials not included in this Section.

B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg-l (silver). Filler metal containing phosphorus is prohibited.

c. J oint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.

D. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for natural gas.

2.5 VALVES

A. Manual Valves: Conform to standards listed, or where appropriate,valves according to ANSI Z21.15 and ANSI Z21.15a.

B. Low-Pressure Gas Stops, 2 Inches and Smaller: AGA-certified design for 2 psig or less natural gas, with AGA stamp, plug or ball type, bronze body and bronze plug or chrome-plated brass ball. Include flat head, square head, or lever handle and threaded ends.

1. Option: Include locking (tamperproof) feature.

C. Gas Valves, 2 Inches and Smaller: ASME B16.33, 150 psi WOG, bronze body, bronze plug, straightaway pattern, square head, tapered-plug type, with threaded ends.


D. Gas Valves, 2 Inches and Smaller: ASME B16.33, 125 psi WOG, cast-iron body, bronze plug, straightaway pattern, square head, tapered-plug type, with threaded ends.


E. Gas Valves, 2 Inches and Smaller: 125 psi WOG minimum, equivalent to ASME B16.33,



lubricated, straightaway pattern, cast-iron or ductile-iron body. Include tapered plug, O-ring seals, square or flat head, and threaded ends.

1. Option: Include locking (tamperproof) device feature.

F. Gas Valves, 2 Inches and Smaller: 125 psi WOG minimum, equivalent to ASME B16.33, nonlubricated plug type with PTFE lining or sleeve, straightaway pattern, cast-iron body. Include square or flat head and threaded ends.


G. Gas Valves, 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: MSS SP-78, Class 125 or 175 WOG, lubricated plug type, semisteel body, wrench operated, with flanged ends.


H. Gas Valves, 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: MSS SP-78, Class 125 or 175 WOG, nonlubricated plug type with PTFE lining or sleeve, semisteel body, wrench operated, with flanged ends.


I. Plastic Gas Valves: ASME B16.40, polyethylene (PE), SDR 11.

J. Valve Boxes: Cast-iron, 2-section box. Top section includes cover with lettering "GAS." Bottom section includes base of size to fit over valve and barrel approximately 5 inches in diameter. Valve box includes adjustable cast-iron extension of length required for depth of bury of valve.

1. Furnish 1 steel operating wrench with each valve box. Include tee-handle with 1 pointed end, stem of length required to operate valve, and socket fitting valve operating nut.

K. Automatic Shutoff Valves: ANSI Z21.21 or ANSI Z21.21a, for operation by appliance automatic shutoff device. Two inches and smaller with threaded ends and 2-1/2 inches and larger with flanged ends.

1. Operation: Mechanical. 2. Operation: Electrical.

L. Earthquake-Actuated Automatic Shutoff Valves: ANSI Z21.70, mechanical operation, with threaded ends for 2 inches and smaller and flanged ends for 2-1/2 inches and larger.

2.6 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Gas Meters: Diaphragm-type, positive displacement, with aluminum cases, temperature compensated, with internal corrosion-resistant components. Include threaded ends for 2 inches and smaller; flanged ends for 2-1/2 inches and larger. Meter pressure ratings and flow volume in standard cubic feet per hour of natural gas at specific gravity are as


.)

)


indicated.

1. Capacity, 500 Cubic Feet per Hour or Less: ANSI Bl09.1. 2. Capacity, Greater than 500 Cubic Feet per Hour: ANSI Bl09.2.

B. Gas Meter Bars: Malleable-iron or cast-iron frame for supporting gas meter. Include meter offset swivel pipes, meter nuts with O-ring seal, factory- or field-installed dielectric unions, and threaded ends.

1. Exception: Omit meter offset swivel pipes when meter bar dimensions match gas meter connections.

C. Gas Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.18 or ANSI Z21.18a, single stage, steel jacketed, corrosion-resistant pressure regulators. Include atmospheric vent, elevation compensator, with threaded ends for 2 inches and smaller and flanged ends for 2-1/2 inches and larger. Regulator pressure ratings, inlet and outlet pressures, and flow volume in standard cubic feet per hour of natural gas at specific gravity are as indicated.

1. Service Gas Pressure Regulators: Inlet pressure rating not less than natural gas distribution system service pressure.

2. Line Gas Pressure Regulators: Inlet pressure rating not less than system pressure. 3. Appliance Gas Pressure Regulators: Inlet pressure rating not less than system

pressure, with capacity and pressure setting matching appliance. 4. Gas Pressure Regulator Vents: Factory- or field-installed corrosion-resistant

screen in opening when not connected to vent piping.

D. Flexible Connectors: ANSI Z21.24 or ANSI Z21.24a, copper alloy.

E. Strainers: Y pattern, full size of connecting piping. Include Type 304 stainless-steel screens with 3/ 64-inch perforations except where other screens are indicated.

1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum steam or 175 psig WOG working pressure except where otherwise indicated.

2. Sizes 2 Inches and Smaller: Bronze body, with female threaded ends. 3. Sizes 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: Cast-iron body, with flanged ends. 4. Screwed screen retainer with centered blowdown and pipe plug.

2.7 PROTECTIVE COATING

A. Furnish pipe and fittings with factory-applied, corrosion-resistant polyethylene coating for use in corrosive atmosphere. Coating properties include:

1. Applied to pipe and fittings treated with a compatible primer prior to application of tape.

2. Overall Thickness: 20 mils, synthetic adhesive. 3. Water Vapor Transmission Rate: Maximum 0.10 gallon per 100 square inches. 4. Water Absorption: 0.02 percent maximum.

2.8 CONCRETE BASES



A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for concrete bases for gas meters, gas pressure regulators, and specialties.

8. Concrete Bases: Precast, reinforced, made of 3000 psi minimum, 28-day compressive strength concrete, and of dimensions not less than those indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Precautions: Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off gas to the premises or section of piping. Perform leakage test as specified in "Field Quality Control" Article to determine that all equipment is turned offin the piping section to be affected.

8. Comply with NFPA 54 "Prevention of Accidental Ignition."

3.2 EXCAVATION

A. Excavation, trenching, and backfilling is specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork"

3.3 SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING

A. Extend natural gas piping and connect to gas distribution system (gas service) piping in location and size indicated for gas service entrance to building.

1. Gas distribution system piping, service gas pressure regulator, and gas meter will be provided by gas utility.

2. Gas distribution system piping, service gas pressure regulator, and gas meter are specified in Division 2 Section "Gas Distribution Systems."

3. Include gas distribution system piping to point indicated. 4. Include gas distribution system piping to point indicated, gas service pressure

regulator, and gas meter. Install in piping and specialty arrangement indicated.

B. Install buried gas distribution system piping with 2 feet minimum cover.

C. Install shutoff valve, downstream of gas meter, outside building at gas service entrance.

3.4 PIPE APPLICATIONS

A. General: Flanges, unions, transition and special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings same or higher than system pressure rating may be used in applications below, except where specified otherwise.

B. Low-Pressure Natural Gas Systems, above Ground within Building: Use the following:

1. 2 Inches and Smaller: Steel pipe, malleable-iron, threaded fittings, and threaded joints.

2. 2 Inches and Smaller: Copper tube, wrought copper fittings, and brazed joints. 3. 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: Steel pipe, butt-welding fittings, and welded joints.


\ '/


>') 3.5 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Use low-pressure gas stops, tapered plug or ball type, for shutoff to appliances with 2-inch or smaller low-pressure gas supply.

B. Use gas valves for shutoff to appliances.

C. Use gas valves of sizes indicated for gas service piping, meters, mains, and where indicated.

D. Use plastic gas valves on plastic gas distribution piping. Install on buried piping with valve box.

3.6 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construction.

B. Use materials suitable for natural gas service.

1. Brazed Joints: Make joints with brazing alloy having melting point greater than 1000 deg F (538 deg C). Brazing alloys containing phosphorus are prohibited.

3.7 PIPING INSTALLATIONS

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping installation requirements.

B. Concealed Locations: Except as specified below, install concealed gas pipmg in an air-tight conduit constructed of Schedule 40 seamless black steel with welded joints. Vent conduit to the outside and terminate with a screened vent cap.

1. Above-Ceiling Locations: Gas piping may be installed in accessible above-ceiling spaces (subject to approval of the authority having jurisdiction), whether or not such spaces are used as a plenum. Do not locate valves in such spaces.

2. In Floors: Gas piping with welded joints and protective wrapping specified in "Protective Coating" Article in Part 2 may be installed in floors, subject to approval of authority having jurisdiction. Surround piping cast in concrete slabs with a minimum of 1-1/2 inches of concrete. Piping may not be in physical contact with other metallic structures such as reinforcing rods or electrically neutral conductors, Do not embed piping in concrete slabs containing quick-set additives or cinder aggregate.

3. In Floor Channels: Gas piping may be installed in floor channels (subject to approval of authority having jurisdiction). Channels must have cover and be open to space above cover for ventilation.

4. In Partitions: Do not install concealed piping in solid partitions. Protect tubing against physical damage when it is installed inside partitions or hollow walls. This does not apply to tubing passing through partitions or walls.

5. In Walls: Gas piping with welded joints and protective wrapping specified in



6.

"Protective Coating" Article in Part 2 may be installed in masonry walls (subject to approval of authority having jurisdiction). Prohibited Locations: Do not install gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator shafts. This does not apply to accessible above-ceiling space specified above.

C. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect. Include outlets of gas meters. Locate where readily accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate would be subject to freezing.

1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use minimum-length nipple of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long, and same size as connected pipe. Install with space between bottom of drip and floor for removal of plug or cap.

D. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, and in floor channels, except where indicated to be exposed to view.

E. Install gas piping at a uniform grade of 1/4 inch in 15 feet, upward toward risers. Install piping upward from service risers to meters, service regulator when meter is not provided, and equipment.

F. Make reductions in pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fittings installed with the level side down.

G. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.

H. Install unions in pipes 2 inches and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are notrequired on flanged devices.

I. Install dielectric fittings (unions and flanges) with 1 ferrous and 1 brass or bronze-end connections, separated by insulating material, where piping of dissimilar metals are joined.

J. Install dielectric fittings (unions and flanges) with 2 ferrous end connections, separated by insulating material, at outlet from gas meter and, where indicated, for ferrous piping.

K. Install flanges on valves, specialties, and equipment having 2-1/2-inch and larger connections.

L. Install strainers on the supply side of each control valve, gas pressure regulator, solenoid valve, and elsewhere as indicated.

M. Anchor piping to ensure proper direction of piping expansion and contraction. Install expansion joints, expansion loops, and pipe guides as indicated.

N. Install vent piping for gas pressure regulators and gas trains, extend outside building, and vent to atmosphere. Terminate vents with turned-down, reducing elbow fittings


(


with corrosion-resistant insect screens in large end.

O. Install containment conduits for buried gas piping within building in gas-tight conduits extending 4 inches minimum outside building and vented to atmosphere. Terminate vents with turned-down, reducing elbow fittings with corrosion-resistant insect screens in large end. Prepare and paint outside of conduits with coal tar epoxy-polyamide paint according to SSPC Paint 16.

P. Install underground plastic gas distribution piping according to ASTM D 2774.

3.8 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Supports and Anchors" for hanger and support devices.

B. Install hangers for horizontal piping with following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

Steel Copper Pipe Max. Tube Max. Min. Rod

Nominal Pipe Size Span Span Diameter (Inches) (Feet) (Feet) (Inches)

3/8 4 3/8 1/2 6 6 3/8 5/8 6 3/8 3/4 8 7 3/8 7/8 7 3/8 1 8 8 3/8 1-1/4 9 9 3/8 1-1/2 to 2 10 10 3/8 2-1/2 to 3-1/2 10 10 1/2 4 10 1/2 4 and Larger 10 5/8

1. Support vertical steel pipe and copper tube at each floor.

3.9 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves in accessible locations, protected from physical damage. Tag valves with a metal tag attached with a metal chain indicating the piping systems supplied.

B. Install a gas valve upstream of each gas pressure regulator. Where two gas pressure regulators are installed in series in a single gas line, a manual valve is not required at the second regulator.

c. Install pressure-relief or pressure-limiting devices so they can be readily operated to determine if valve is free; test to determine pressure at which they will operate; and examine for leakage when in closed position.



3.10

A.

B.

c.

3.11

A.

B.

3.12

A.

B.

3.13

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

3.14

A.

CONNECTIONS

Install gas piping next to gas-utilizing equipment and appliances to allow servicing and maintenance.

Connect gas piping to gas-utilizing equipment and appliances with shutoff valves and unions. Make connections downstream of valves and unions, with flexible connectors where indicated.

Electrical Connections: Wiring is specified in Division 16.

TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

Install a gas valve upstream and within 6 feet of each gas-utilizing appliance. Install a union or flanged connection downstream from the valve to permit removal of controls.

Sediment Traps: Install tee fittings forming drips, as close as practical to gas appliance inlets. Cap or plug bottom outlet.

ELECTRICAL BONDING AND GROUNDING

Install above-ground portions of natural gas piping systems that are upstream from equipment shutoff valves, electrically continuous and bonded to a grounding electrode according to NFPA 70.

Do not use gas piping as a grounding electrode.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

Inspect, test, and purge natural gas systems according to NFPA 54; Part 4 "Gas Piping Inspection, Testing, and Purging" and local gas utility requirements.

Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest system until satisfactory results are obtained.

Report test results promptly and in writing to the Architect and the authority having jurisdiction.

Verify capacities and pressure ratings of gas meters, regulators, valves, and specialties.

Verify correct pressure settings for pressure regulators.

Verify that specified piping tests are complete.

ADJUSTING

Adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and safety devices.



)

( . I·

Section 15530 - Page 1 of10 REFRIGERANT PIPING

SECTION 15530 - REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Requirements of the following Division 15 Sections apply to this section:

1. Basic Mechanical Requirements. 2. Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods. 3. Supports and Anchors.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air conditioning applications. This Section includes:

1. Pipes, tubing, fittings, and specialties. 2. Special duty valves. 3. Refrigerants.

B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:

1. Division 2, Section "Earthwork" for trenching and backfilling for installation of underground refrigerant piping.

2. Division 7, Section "Roof Accessories" for roof curbs, piping supports, and roof penetration boots.

3. Division 7, Section "Joint Sealers" for materials and methods for sealing pipe penetrations through basement walls and fire/smoke barriers.

4. Division 15, Section "Mechanical Identification" for labeling and identification of refrigerant piping.

5. Division 15, Section "Mechanical Insulation" for pipe insulation.

C. Products installed but not furnished under this Section include pre-charged tubing, refrigerant specialties, and refrigerant accessories furnished as an integral part of or separately with packaged air conditioning equipment.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data for the following products:

B.

1. Each type valve specified. 2. Each type refrigerant piping specialty specified.

Shop Drawings showing layout of refrigerant piping, specialties, and fittings including, but not necessarily limited to, pipe and tube sizes, valve arrangements and locations,


Section 15530 - Page 2 of 10 REFRIGERANT PIPING

slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floor penetrations, and equipment connection details. Show interface and spatial relationship between piping and proximate to equipment.<}

C. Brazer's Certificates signed by Contractor certifying that brazers comply with requirements specified under "Quality Assurance" below.

D. Maintenance data for refrigerant valves and piping specialties, for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1 and Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements."


A. Qualify brazing processes and brazing operators in accordance with ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code," Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications".

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following codes:

1. ANSI B31.5: ASME Code for Pressure Piping - Refrigerant Piping. 2. ANSI/ ASHRAE Standard 15: Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. 3. BOCA Basic National Mechanical Code.


A. Coordinate the installation of roof piping supports, and roof penetrations. Roof specialties are specified in Division 7.

2PART - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:


1. Refrigerant Valves and Specialties:

a. Alco Controls Div, Emerson Electric. b. Danfoss Electronics, Inc. c. EATON Corporation, Control Div. d. Henry Valve Company. e. Parker-Hannifin Corporation, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Division. f. Sporlan Valve Company.

2.2 PIPE AND TUBING MATERIALS

A. General: Refer to Part 3, Article "PIPE APPLICATION" for identification of systems where


the below specified pipe and fitting materials are used.


B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B 280, Type ACR, hard-drawn straight lengths, and soft-annealed coils, seamless copper tubing. Tubing shall be factory cleaned, ready for installation, and have ends capped to protect cleanliness of pipe interiors prior to shipping.

C. Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L, hard-drawn straight lengths, and soft-annealed coils, seamless copper tubing.

2.3 FITTINGS

A. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ANSI B16.22, streamlined pattern.

2.4 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg-l (Silver).

2.5 VALVES

A. General: Complete valve assembly shall be UL-listed and designed to conform to ARI 760.

B. Globe: 450 psig maximum operating pressure, 275 deg. F maximum operating temperature; cast bronze body, with cast bronze or forged brass wing cap and bolted bonnet; replaceable resilient seat disc; plated steel stem. Valve shall be capable of being repacked under pressure. Valve shall be straight through or angle pattern, with solderend connections.

C. Check Valves - Smaller Than 7/8 inch: 500 psig maximum operating pressure, 300 deg. F maximum operating temperature; cast brass body, with removable piston, Teflon seat, and stainless steel spring; straight through globe design. Valve shall be straight through pattern, with solder-end connections.

D. Check Valves - 7/8 inch and Larger: 450 psig maximum operating pressure, 300 deg. F maximum operating temperature; cast bronze body, with cast bronze or forged brass bolted bonnet; floating piston with mechanically retained Teflon seat disc. Valve shall be straight through or angle pattern, with solder-end connections.

E. Solenoid Valves: 250 deg. F temperature rating, 400 psig working pressure; forged brass, with Teflon valve seat, two-way straight through pattern, and solder end connections. Provide manual operator to open valve. Furnish complete with NEMA 1 solenoid enclosur:e with 1/2 inch conduit adapter, and 24 volt, 60 Hz. normally closed holding coil.

F. Evaporator Pressure Regulating Valves: pilot-operated, forged brass or cast bronze; complete with pilot operator, stainless steel bottom spring, pressure gage tappings, 24 volts DC, 50/60 Hz, standard coil; and wrought copper fittings for solder end connections.

G. Thermal Expansion Valves: thermostatic adjustable, modulating type; size as required



for specific evaporator requirements, and factory set for proper evaporator superheat requirements. Valves shall have copper fittings for solder end connections; complete with sensing bulb, a distributor having a side connection for hot gas bypass line, and an external equalizer line.

H. Hot Gas Bypass Valve: adjustable type, sized to provide capacity reduction beyond the last step of compressor unloading; and wrought copper fittings for solder end connections.

2.6 REFRIGERANT PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. General: Complete refrigerant piping specialty assembly shall be UL-listed and designed to conform to ARI 760.

B. Strainers: 500 psig maximum working pressure; forged brass body with monel80-mesh screen, and screwed cleanout plug; Y -pattern, with solder end connections.

C. Moisture/liquid Indicators: 500 psig maximum operation pressure, 200 deg. F maximum operating temperature; forged brass body, with replaceable polished optical viewing window, and solder end connections.

D. Filter-driers: 500 psig maximum operation pressure; steel shell, flange ring, and spring, ductile iron cover plate with steel capscrews, and wrought copper fittings for solder end connections. Furnish complete with replaceable filter-drier core kit, including gaskets, as follows:

1. Standard capacity desiccant sieves to provide micronic filtration. 2. High capacity desiccant sieves to provide micronic filtration and extra drying

capacity.

E. Suction Line Filter-Drier: 350 psig maximum operation pressure, 225 deg. F maximum operating temperature; steel shell, and wrought copper fittings for solder end connections. Permanent filter element shall be molded felt core surrounded by a desiccant. for removal of acids and moisture for refrigerant vapor.

F. Suction Line Filters: 500 psig maximum operation pressure; steel shell, flange ring, and spring, ductile iron cover plate with steel caps crews, and wrought copper fittings for solder end connections. Furnish complete with replaceable filter core kit, including gaskets, as follows:

G. Flanged Unions: 400 psig maximum working pressure, 330 deg. F maximum operating temperature; twa brass tailpiece adapters for solder end connections to copper tubing; flanges for 7/8 inch through 1-5/8 inch unions shall be forged steel, and for 2-1/8 inch through 3-1/8 inch shall be ductile iron; four plated steel bolts, with silicon bronze nuts and fiber gasket. Flanges and bolts shall have factory-applied rust-resistant coating.

H. Flexible Connectors: 500 psig maximum operating pressure; seamless tin bronze or stainless steel core, high tensile bronze braid covering, solder connections, and synthetic covering; dehydrated, pressure tested, minimum 7 inch in length.


2.7 REFRIGERANT


A. Refrigerant as per equipment manufacturer's recommendations, in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 34.

3PART - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine rough-in for refrigerant piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation.

3.2 PIPE APPLICATIONS

A. Use Type L, or Type ACR drawn copper tubing with wrought copper fittings and brazed joints above ground, within bUilding. Use Type K, annealed temper copper tubing for 2 inch and smaller without joints, below ground and within slabs. Mechanical fittings (crimp or flair) are not permitted.

1. Install annealed temper tubing in pipe duct. Vent pipe duct to the outside.

B. If other than Type ACR tubing is used, clean and protect inside of tubing as specified in Article "CLEANING" below.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS IZl

A. General: Install refrigerant piping in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 15 - "The Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration."

B. Install piping in as short and direct arrangement as possible to minimize pressure drop.

C. Install piping for minimum number of joints using as few elbows and other fitting as possible.

D. Arrange piping to allow normal inspection and servicing of compressor and other equipment. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for servicing and inspection.

E. Provide adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hanger, or between pipes for insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit installation of full thickness insulation. .

F. Insulate suction lines. Liquid line are not required to be insulated, except where they are installed adjacent and clamped to suction lines, where both liquid and suction lines shall be insulated as a unit.

1. Do not install insulation until system testing has been completed and all leaks have been eliminated.



G. Install branch tie-in lines to parallel compressors equal length, and pipe identically and symmetrically.

H. Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing will be exposed to mechanical injury.

I. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:

1. Install horizontal hot gas discharge piping with 1/2" per 10 feet downward slope away from the compressor.

2. Install horizontal suction lines with 1/2 inch per 10 feet downward slope to the compressor, with no long traps or dead ends which may cause oil to separate from the suction gas and return to the compressor in damaging slugs.

3. Install traps and double risers where indicated, and where required to entrain oil in vertical runs.

4. Liquid lines may be install level.

J. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections.

K. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted, unless expressly indicated.

L. Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to permit proper insulation applications.

M. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, unless indicated to be exposed to view.

N. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other permanent elements of the building. Provide space to permit insulation applications, with·l inch clearance outside the insulation. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for panel removal.

O. Locate groups of piper parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves.

P. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Pipe sleeves smaller than 6 inch shall be steel; pipe sleeves 6 inch and larger shall be sheet metal.

Q. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Where pipes pass through fire rated walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors, maintain the fire rated integrity. Refer to Division 7 for special sealers and materials.

R. Make reductions in pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fittings installed with the level side down.

S. Install strainers immediately ahead of each expansion valve, solenoid valve, hot gas bypass valve, compressor suction valve, and as required to protect refrigerant piping system components.


Section 15530 - Page 7 ofl0 REFRIGERANT PIPING

T. Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid lines between filter/driers and thermostatic expansion valves and in liquid line to receiver.

1. Install moisture/liquid indicators in lines larger than 2-1/8 inch OD, using a bypass line.

U. Install unions to allow removal of solenoid valves, pressure regulating valves, expansion valves, and at connections to compressors and evaporators.

V. Install flexible connectors at the inlet and discharge connection of compressors.

3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Hanger, supports, and anchors are specified in Division 15 Section "SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS." Conform to the table below for maximum spacing of supports:

B. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet in length.

2. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet orlonger. 3. Pipe rollers complete supports for multiple horizontal runs, 20 feet or longer

supported by a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.

C. Install hangers with the following minimum rod sizes and maximum spacing:

MIN. ROD SIZE -NOM. PIPE SIZE MAX. SPAN-FT INCHES

1 7 3/8 1-1/2 9 3/8 2 10 3/8 3 12 1/2 3-1/2 13 1/2 4 14 5/8 5 16 5/8 6 17 3/4 8 19 7/8 10 22 7/8 12 23 7/8

D. Support vertical runs at each floor.

3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Brazed Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS "Brazing Manual."



1. WARNING: Some filler metals contain compounds which produce highly toxic fumes when heated. Avoid breathing fumes. Provide adequate ventilation.

2. CAUTION: When solenoid valves are being installed, remove the coil to prevent damage. When sight glasses are being installed, remove the glass. Remove stems, seats, and packing of valves, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties before brazing. Do no apply heat near the bulb of the expansion valve.

B. Fill the pipe and fittings during brazing, with an inert gas (ie., nitrogen or carbon dioxide) to prevent formation of scale.

C. Heat joints using oxy-acetylene torch. Heat to proper and uniform brazing temperature.

3.6 VALVE INSTALLATIONS

A. General: Install refrigerant valves where indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install globe valves on each side of strainers and driers, in liquid and suction lines at evaporators, and elsewhere as indicated.

C. Install a full sized, 3-valve bypass around each drier.

D. Install solenoid valves ahead of each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve. Install solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at the top.

1. Electrical wiring for solenoid valves is specified in Division 16. Coordinate electrical requirements and connections.

E. Thermostatic expansion valves may be mounted in any position, as close as possible to the evaporator.

1. Where refrigerant distributors are used, mount the distributor directly on the expansion valve outlet.

2. Install the valve in such a location so that the diaphragm case is warmer than the bulb.

3. Secure the bulb to a clean, straight, horizontal section of the suction line using two bulb straps. Do not mount bulb in a trap or at the bottom of the line.

4. Where external equalizer lines are required make the connection where it will clearly reflect the pressure existing in the suction line at the bulb location.

F. Install pressure regulating and relieving valves as required by ASHRAE Standard 15.

3.7 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. The Drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow servicing and maintenance.


Shafter-Wasco Irrigation District- Office -#01-267

)


A. Inspect, test, and perform corrective action of refrigerant piping in accordance with ASME Code B31.s, Chapter VI.

B. Repair leaking joints using new materials, and retest for leaks.

3.9 CLEANING IZJ

A. Before installation of copper tubing other than Type ACR tubing, clean the tubing and fitting using following cleaning procedure:

3.10

A.

B.

C.

3.11

A.

1. Remove coarse particles of dirt and dust by drawing a clean, lintless cloth through the tubing by means of a wire or an electrician's tape.

2. Draw a clean, lintless cloth saturated with trichloroethylene through the tube or pipe. Continue this procedure until cloth is not discolored by dirt.

3. Draw a clean, lintless cloth, saturated with compressor oil, squeezed dry, through the tube or pipe to remove remaining lint. Inspect tube or pipe visually for remaining dirt and lint.

4. Finally, draw a clean, dry, lintless cloth through the tube or pipe.

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

Verify actual evaporator applications and operating conditions, and adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat requirements. Clean and inspect refrigerant piping systems in accordance with requirements of Division-iS Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section "Pipes and Pipe Fittings".

Adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment with new materials and products.

COMMISSIONING

Charge system using the following procedure:

1. Install core in filter dryer after leak test but before evacuation. 2. Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump; until temperature of 35 deg F is

indicated on vacuum dehydration indicator. 3. During evacuation, apply heat to pockets, elbows, and low spots in piping. 4. Maintain vacuum on system for minimum of 5 hours after closing valve between

vacuum pump and system. 5. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allow pressure to build up to 2 psi. 6. Complete charging of system, using new filter dryer core in charging line. Provide

full operating charge.

B. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to start-up and shut-down, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventative maintenance of refrigerant piping valves and refrigerant piping specialties.

C. Review data in Operating and Maintenance Manuals. Refer to Division 1 section "Project Closeout."



D. Schedule training with Owner through the Architect, with at least 7 days advance notice.



. )

{ -

Section 15610 - Page 1 of 6 FURNACES

SECTION 15610 - FURNACES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes furnaces and accessories listed below, complete with controls.

1. Gas-Fired Furnaces. 2. Cooling Coils for Furnaces.

B. Related Section: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 15 Section "Motors" for motors used in furnaces. 2. Division 15 Section "Condensing Units" for condensing units used with cooling

coils provided in furnaces. 3. Division 15 Section "Refrigerant Piping" for piping and connections for cooling

coils provided in furnaces .

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AFUE: Minimum annual fuel utilization efficiency certified by an independent testing agency in accordance with US Department of Energy Test Procedures.

B. Control Wiring: Wire, conduit, and miscellaneous materials for mounting and connecting electric control devices.

C. Furnace: A self-contained, indirect-fired or electrically heated appliance, with or without cooling coils, that supplies conditioned air through ducts to spaces that require it.

D. Lowboy-Type Furnace: An upflow furnace (heated air discharged from the top) that also has the return air inlet in the top of the furnace cabinet.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data including weights and dimensions and data on features and components.

C.

Include plan and elevation views of units, minimum clearances, and data on ratings and capacities.

Maintenance data for products for inclusion in "Operating and Maintenance Manual" specified in Division 1.



D. Wiring diagrams from manufacturers detailing electrical requirements for power and control wiring for furnaces. Include ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring required for field installation. Differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory installed and portions that are to be field installed.


A. Comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code."

B. NRTL Listing: Provide electrical components specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.

1. Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the "National Electrical Code," Article 100.


1.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance Service: Provide maintenance of furnaces for a period of 12 months commencing with substantial completion, using factory-authorized service representatives.

1. Basic Services: A minimum of two systematic, routine maintenance visits on a seasonal basis at times coordinated with the Owner. In addition, respond to service calls within 24 hours of notification of trouble. Adjust and replace defective parts and components with original manufacturer's replacement items. At each visit, perform maintenance services recommended by the manufacturer for the maintenance interval and season existing at the time. Repeat adjustment required under "Commissioning" article in Part 3 of this Section as needed to improve heating results.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. General: Furnish extra materials matching products installed, as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage, and identified with labels clearly describing contents.

1. Disposable Air Filters: Furnish a quantity equal to 200 percent of the number of filters installed.

2. Fan Belts: Furnish quantity equal to 15 percent of the number of belts installed for furnace fans, but not less than one set.

2PART - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers


Section 15610 - Page 3 of6 FURNACES

offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. Gas Furnaces:

a. Byrant BDP Div., United Technologies. b. Carrier Corp. c. Lennox Industries, Inc. d. Snyder General Corp. e. The Trane Co. f. York

2.2 FURNACES, GENERAL

A. Type: Gas-fired, medium efficiency.

B. Type: Gas-fired, high efficiency.

C. Configuration: Upflow.

D. Configuration: Upflow with cooling coil.

E. Configuration: Downflow.

F. Configuration: Downflow with cooling coil.

G. Configuration: Horizontal.

H. Configuration: Horizontal with cooling coil.

I. Configuration: Lowboy.

J. Configuration: Lowboy with cooling coil.

K. Gas-Fired Furnaces and Accessory Items: NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas Code."

1. AGA Approval: Furnaces shall bear the label of the American Gas Association.

2. Type of Gas: Furnaces shall be listed for use with natural gas.

L. Provide furnace types and minimum ratings and capacities as indicated.

M. Provide furnaces that are factory assembled, piped, wired, and tested.

N. Cabinet: Steel with foil-faced, glass fiber interior insulation. Lift-out panels expose burners, and all other items requiring access for maintenance.



O. Main Fan: Centrifugal-type, factory-balanced, resilient-mounted steel.

P. Motors: Energy efficient type as specified in Division 15 Section "Motors." Totally enclosed, with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication.

2.3 GAS-FIRED FURNACES, MEDIUM EFFICIENCY

A. General: Comply with ANSI Z21.47, Gas-Fired Central Furnaces.

B. Efficiency: AFUE 78 percent, minimum.

C. Automatic Fan Thermal Switch: Delays fan start until discharge air is heated. Delays fan shutdown until air cools to comfort threshold.

D. Summer Fan Relay: Connected to permit independent remote 24 V a.c. on-off switching of unit fan.

E. Automatic Gas Control: Single-stage, 24 V a.c. valve.

F. Ignition: Electric spark or hot surface ceramic igniter with flame sensor.

G. Venting: Atmospheric.

H. Venting: Power venting, using integral centrifugal fan and side wall vent termination.

2.4 GAS-FIRED FURNACES, HIGH EFFICIENCY

A. General: Comply with ANSI Z21.47, Gas-Fired Central Furnaces.

B. Efficiency: AFUE 90 percent, minimum.

C. Ignition: Electric spark with flame sensor, or direct-sensing, silicon carbide hot surface igniter.

D. Automatic Fan Thermal Switch: Delays fan start until discharge air is heated. Delays fan shutdown until air cools to comfort threshold.

E. Control Transformer: 120 V a.c.j24 Va.c.

F. Heat Exchanger: Aluminized steel.

G. Heat Exchanger: Stainless steel.

H. Combustion Air Source: Outside via combustion air inlet pipe.

I. Combustion Air Source: Ambient air at location of heater.

2.5 AIR CLEANING

A. Filter: i-inch, disposable, fiberglass type mounted in furnace.



B. Air Cleaner: High efficiency disposable filter factory mounted in furnace. Comply with UL 586, "Air Filter Units, High Efficiency, Particulate," Section of ASHRAE "Standard Test Procedure No. 52-76.

2.6 COOLING FEATURES

A. Evaporator Coil: Conform to ARI 210-240, "Unitary Air Conditioning and Air Source Heat Pump Equipment." Matched with furnace as recommended by furnace manufacturer. Matched with remote condensing unit specified in Division 15 Section, "Condensing Units," with type, capacity, and pressure drop ratings as indicated. Include condensate drain pan with accessible drain outlet.

B. Evaporator Coil Enclosure: As recommended by furnace manufacturer to suit furnace and cooling coil. Steel cabinet with access panel and flanges for integral mounting at or on furnace cabinet.

2.7 FINISHES

A. External Casings and Cabinets: Baked enamel over corrosion-resistant treated surface.

3PART - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION

A. Installation and connection of gas-fired furnaces and associated fuel and vent features and systems shall be in accordance with NFPA 54, applicable local codes and regulations, and manufacturer's published installation instructions.

1. Connect gas piping in accordance with Division 15 Section "Natural Gas Systems.

2. Vents, Outside Air Pipe Connections, and Drains: Where PVC piping is used, install in accordance with Division 15 Section "Basic Piping Materials and Methods." Install vent terminal designed to protect against entrance of birds, insects, and dirt.

3. Connect condensate drain pans using Type M copper tubing with streamline drainage fittings and soldered joints. Extend to nearest equipment drain or floor drain. Construct vented, deep trap at connection to drain pan and install cleanouts at changes in direction. Terminate to suit local code requirements, except where stricter methods are indicated.

B. Base-Mounted Units: Secure units to substrate. Provide optional bottom closure base where installation conditions require.

C. Controls: Install thermostats where indicated.

D. Connect ducts in accordance with Division 15 Section "Metal Ductwork"

3.2 IDENTIFICATION



A. Identify furnaces and connections in accordance with Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."

3.3 COMMISSIONING

A. Test functions, operations, and control sequences and protective features. Adjust to assure operation is in accordance with specification.

B. Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified requirements are met.

3.4 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. Cleaning: Upon completion of installation, inspect furnaces and associated components. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish. Clean unit internally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.

B. Adjusting: Make control, burner, and other adjustments for optimum heating performance and efficiency. Adjust heat distribution features, including shutters, dampers, and relays to provide optimum heating performance and system efficiency.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Training: Arrange and pay for the services of a factory-authorized service representative to demonstrate adjustment, operation, and maintenance of furnaces and to train Owner's personnel.

B. Conduct a minimum of 2 hours of training as specified under "Instructions to Owner's Employees" in the "Project Closeout" Section of these specifications.

C. Schedule training with at least seven days advance notification.



r:

SECTION 15670 - CONDENSING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

Section 15670 - Page 1 of 5 CONDENSING UNITS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-l Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

B. Division-iS Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods sections apply to work of this section.

1.2 SUMMARY:

A. Section includes:

1. Air-cooled condensing units.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 15030 - Electrical Provisions for Mechanical Work 2. Section 15530 - Refrigerant Piping 3. Section 16142 - Electrical Connections for Equipment

~, 1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including rated capacities of selected model clearly indicated, weights (shipping, installed, and operating), dimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components, furnished specialties and accessories; and installation and start-up instructions.

B. Wiring Diagrams: Submit ladder-type wiring diagrams for power and control wiring required for final installation of condensing units and controls. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each condensing unit, control, and accessory; including "trouble shooting" maintenance guide; plus servicing, and preventative maintenance procedures and schedule. Include this data and product data in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of condensing units, of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Codes and Standards:



1. Capacity ratings for condensing units shall be in accordance with ARI Standard 360 "Standard for Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment".

2. Refrigeration system of condensing units shall be constructed in accordance with ASHRAE Standard ASHRAE 15 "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration".

3. Condensing units shall meet or exceed the minimum COP/Efficiency levels as prescribed in ASHRAE 90A "Energy Conservation in New Building Design".

4. Construction and testing of water cooled condensing units shall be in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII.

5. Condensing units shall be listed by UL and have UL label affixed.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:

A. Handle condensing units and components carefully to prevent damage. Follow manufacturer's written instructions for rigging. Replace damaged condensing units or components.

B. Store condensing units and components in clean dry place off the ground. Protect from weather, water, and physical damage.

1.6 SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTY:

A. Warranty on Motor/Compressor: Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer, agreeing to replace/repair, within warranty period, motors/compressors with inadequate or defective materials and workmanship, including leakage, breakage, improper assembly, or failure to perform as required; provided manufacturer's instructions for handling, installing, protecting, and maintaining units have been adhered to during warranty period. Replacement is limited to component replacement only, and does not include labor for removal and reinstallation.

1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of substantial completion.

2PART - PRODUCTS

2.1 AIR-COOLED CONDENSING UNITS:

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering air-cooled condensing units which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide air-cooled condensing units of one of the following:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

BDP Co; Div Carrier Corp. Carrier Air Conditioning; Div of Carrier Corp. McQuay Air Conditioning Group; McQuay Inc. Trane (The) Co; Div American Standard Inc. York; Div of York International.


, \ .

.; j

C.


General: factory-assembled and tested air-cooled condensing units, consisting of casing, compressors, condensers, coils, condenser fans and motors, and unit controls. Capacities and electrical characteristics are scheduled (on the Drawings ) (at the end of this Section).

D. Unit Casings: designed for outdoor installation and complete with weather protection for components and controls, and complete with removable panels for required access to compressors, controls, condenser fans, motors, and drives. Additional features include:

1. steel, galvanized or zinc-coated, for exposed casing surfaces, treated and finished with manufacturer's standard paint coating;

2. lifting lugs to facilitate rigging of units; 3. factory-installed metal grilles, for protection of condenser coil during shipping,

installation, and operation; 4. hinged and gasketed control panel door.

E. Compressor: reciprocating hermetic-type compressor, designed for air-cooled condensing, complete with crankcase sight glass, crankcase heater, and backseating service access valves on suction and discharge ports. Capacity shall be controlled through cylinder unloading. Additional features include:

1. Crankcase heater in well within crankcase; 2. Capacity steps as scheduled, or greater number; 3. Compressor of same manufacturer as condensing unit.

F. Controls: Operating and safety controls shall include high and low pressure cutouts, oil pressure cutout, compressor winding thermostat cutout, 3-leg compressor overload protection, and condenser fan motors with thermal and overload cutouts. Control transformer if required shall be 11S-volts. Provide magnetic contactors for compressor and condenser fan motors. Additional features include:

1. Reset relay circuit for manual resetting of cutouts from remote thermostat location;

2. Automatic nonrecycling pump down, and timing device to prevent excessive compressor cycling;

3. Unfused disconnect switch, factory-mounted and wired, for single external electrical power connection.

G. Condensing Section: Condenser coil shall be seamless copper tubing mechanically bonded to heavy-duty, configurated aluminum fins, with separate and independent refrigeration circuit for each compressor. Units shall include liquid accumulator and sub cooling circuit, and backseating liquid line service access valve. Condenser coils shall be factory-tested at 450 psig, vacuum dehydrate, and filled with a holding charge of nitrogen.

H. Condenser fans and drives: propeller-type condenser fans for vertical air discharge; either direct drive or belt drive. Additional features include:

1. Permanent lubricated ball bearing condenser fan motors; 2. Separate motor for each condenser fan;



3. 4.

Constant speed condenser fan motors; Each fan assembly shall be dynamically and statically balanced.

I. Low ambient control: factory-installed low ambient damper assembly, fan speed control, or fan cycling control.

3PART - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION:

A. Verify roof structure, mounting supports, and membrane installations are completed to the proper point to allow installation of roof mounted units. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION:

A. General: Install condensing units in accordance with manufacturers installation instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.

B. Support:

1.

2.

3.

Install ground-mounted units on 4" thick reinforced concrete pad, 4" larger on each side than condensing unit. Concrete is specified in Division 3. Coordinate installation of anchoring devices. Install roof-mounted units on equipment supports specified in Division 7. Anchor unit to supports with removable fasteners. Residential Units: Connect pre-charged refrigerant tubing to unit's quick-connect fittings. Run tubing so as not to interfere with access to unit.

a. Install furnished accessories.

4. Air-Cooled Condensing Units: Connect refrigerant piping to unit; maintain required access to unit.

a. Install furnished field-mounted accessories.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:

A. Testing:

1. Charge systems with refrigerant and oil, and test for leaks. Repair leaks and replace lost refrigerant and oil.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION:

A. Provide services of manufacturer's authorized service representative to provide start-up service and to instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of condensing units.


(

)


B. Start-up condensing units, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.

C. Train Owner's personnel on start-up and shut-down procedures, troubleshooting procedures, servicing, and preventative maintenance schedule and procedures. Review with the Owner's personnel, the data contained in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals specified in Division One.

1. Schedule training with Owner, provide at least 7 -day prior notice to Architect/Engineer.



Section 15860 - Page 1 of9 CENTRIFUGAL FANS

SECTION 15860 - CENTRIFUGAL FANS

PART 1- GENERAL




1. "Basic Mechanical Requirements." 2. "Basic Materials and Methods."

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following types of centrifugal fans:

1. Centrifugal fans. 2. Inline centrifugal fans.

B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:

1.

2. 3. 4.

Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for airhandling systems testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements and procedures. Division 16 Section "Circuit and Motor Disconnects" for disconnect switches. Division 16 Section "Motor Controllers" for motor starters. Division 16 Section "Motor Control Centers" for starters and fusible switches.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections:

1. Product data for selected models, including specialties, accessories, and the following:

a. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

b. Certified fan sound power ratings. c. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and fan accessories. d. Materials gages and finishes, including color charts. e. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

2. Shop drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, components, and location and size of field connections.

3. Coordination drawings, in accordance with Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements, "for fan room layouts and for reflected ceiling plans drawn


Section 15860 - Page 2 of 9 CENTRIFUGAL FANS

accurately to scale and coordinating penetrations and units mounted above ceiling. Show the following:

a. Ceiling suspension members. b. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. c. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. d. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,

sprinkler heads, access panels, and special moldings.

4. Wiring diagrams that detail power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed wiring and field- installed wiring. 5. Product certificates, signed by manufacturers of centrifugal fans, certifying that

their products comply with specified requirements. 6. Maintenance data for air-handling units, for inclusion in Operating and

Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1 and Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements."


A. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.

B. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code."


A. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.

B. Disassemble and reassemble units as required for movement into the final location following manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Deliver fan units as a factory-assembled unit to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with protective crating and covering.


A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete equipment pads. Cast anchor bolt inserts into pad.

B. Coordinate the size and location of structural steel support members.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish one additional complete set of belts for each belt-driven fan.

2PART - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include but are not limited to, the following:


1. Centrifugal Fans:

a. Ammerman Company, Inc. b. Bayley Fan Group. c. Central Blower Co. d. Cook (Loren) Co. e. Greenheck Fan Corp. f. Peerless-Winsmith, Inc. g. Trane Co. h. Twin City Fan and Blower Co.

2. Inline Centrifugal Fans:

a. Cook (Loren) Co. b. FloAire, Inc. c. Greenheck Fan Corp. d. ILG Industries, Inc. e. J enn Industries Inc.

2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required:

1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA Standard 301 "Method for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings From Laboratory Test Data." Test fans in accordance with AMCA Standard 300 "Test Code for Sound Rating." Fans shall be licensed to bear the AMCA Certified Sound Ratings Seal.

2. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings in accordance with AMCA Standard 210/ ASHRAE Standard 51- Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating.

2.3 FANS, GENERAL

A. General: Provide fans that are factory fabricated and assembled, factory tested, and factory finished, with indicated capacities and characteristics.

B. Fans and Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at the maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower.

1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel, designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of the first critical speed at the top of the speed range of the fan's



class.

C. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation.

1. Service Factor: 1.4.

D. Belts: Oil-resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic.

E. Motors and Fan Wheel Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 15 HP; fixed pitch for use with motors larger than 15 HP. Select pulley so that pitch adjustment is at the middle of the adjustment range at fan design conditions.

1. Belt Guards: Provide steel belt guards for motors mounted on the outside of the fan cabinet.

F. Shaft Bearings: Provide type indicated, having a median life "Rating Life" (AFBMA (LSO)) of 200,000, calculated in accordance with AFBMA Standard 9 for ball bearings and AFBMA Standard 11 for roller bearings.

G. Factory Finish: The following finishes are required:

1. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coating prior to final assembly. 2. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.

2.4 CENTRIFUGAL FANS

A. General Description: Belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, and support structure.

B. Housings: Fabricated from formed and reinforced galvanized steel panels to form curved scroll housings with continuously welded or deep-locked seams and access doors or panels to allow access to internal parts and components.

1. Inlet Cones: Spun metal. 2. Duct Connections: Flanged. 3. Panel Bracing: Steel angle- or channel-iron member supports for mounting and

supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories.

C. Fan Wheels: Single-width, single-inlet, welded cast-aluminum hub and spun steel inlet cone, with hub keyed to the shaft.

1. Blade Materials: Aluminum. 2. Blade Type: Backward-curved, flat-plate type. 3. Blade Type: Backward-curved, airfoil type. 4. Blade Type: Forward-curved, airfoil type.

D. Shaft Bearings: Prelubricated and sealed, self-aligning, pillow- block-type ball bearings.

E. Shaft Bearings: Grease-lubricated, self-aligning, pillow-block type; tapered roller



bearings with double-locking collars and two- piece, cast-iron housing.

F. Shaft Bearings: Grease-lubricated, self-aligning, pillow-block type, with double spherical roller bearings with adapter mount and two-piece cast-iron housing.

G. Accessories: The following accessories are required where indicated:

1. Inlet Screens: Heavy wire mesh screens, mounted inside of shaft bearings. 2. Discharge Dampers: Heavy-gage steel, opposed blade design, with linkage for

manual or automatic operation. 3. Drain Connections: Threaded, 3/4-inch NPS, capped nipple installed at lowest

point of housing. 4. Shaft Cooler: Metal disc between bearings and fan wheel, designed to dissipate

heat from shaft. S. Spark-Resistant Construction: AMCA construction option A, B, or C as indicated. 6. Shaft Seals: Air-tight seals installed around shaft on drive side of single-width

fans.

2.5 INLINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS

A. General Description: Inline, belt-driven, centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, outlet guide vanes, fan shaft, bearings, drive assembly, motor and disconnect switch, mounting brackets, and accessories.

B. Housing: minimum 18 gauge steel with factory finish, inlet and outlet flanges, and support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting.

C. Direct-Drive Units: Motor encased in housing out of air stream, factory-wired to disconnect located on outside of fan housing.

D. Belt-Drive Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable sheaves, enclosure around belts within fan housing, and lubricating tubes from fan bearings extended to outside of fan housing.

E. Wheel: Aluminum, backward inclined blades welded to aluminum hub.

F. Accessories: The following accessories are required as indicated:

1. Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections. 2. Fan Guards: Expanded metal in removable frame.

2.6 MOTORS

A. Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to accelerate the driven loads satisfactorily.

B. Motor Sizes: Minimum sizes and characteristics as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so that the driven load will not require the motor to operate in the service factor range.

C. Temperature Rating: SO deg C maximum temperature rise at 40 deg C ambient for



continuous duty at full load (Class A Insulation).

D. Service Factor: 1.15 for polyphase motors and 1.35 for single-phase motors. Provide permanent-split capacitor classification motors for shaft-mounted fans and capacitor start classification for belted fans.

E. Motor Construction: NEMA Standard MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B.

1. Bases: Adjustable. 2. Bearings: The following features are required:

a. Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals. b. Grease lubricated. c. Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives produce

lateral or axial thrust in motor. 3. Enclosure Type: The following features are required:

a. Open drip-proof motors where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation.

b. Guarded drip-proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building occupants.

4. Overload protection: Built-in, automatic reset, thermal overload protection. 5. Noise rating: Quiet. 6. Efficiency: Energy-efficient motors shall have a minimum efficiency as scheduled "

in accordance with IEEE Standard 112, Test Method B. If efficiency not specified, (\ motors shall have a higher efficiency than "average standard industry motors" in accordance with IEEE Standard 112, Test Method B.

7. Nameplate: Indicate the full identification of manufacturer, ratings, characteristics, construction, and special features.

F. Starters, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are specified in Division 16.

3PART - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, housekeeping pads, and other conditions affecting performance of fans.

B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install fans level and plumb, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Support units as described below, using the vibration control devices indicated. Vibration control devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Vibration Controls."


( \ .


1. Support floor-mounted units on concrete equipment bases using neoprene pads. Secure units to anchor bolts installed in concrete equipment base.

2. Support floor-mounted units on concrete equipment bases using housed spring isolators. Secure units to anchor bolts installed in concrete equipment base.

3. Suspended Units: Suspend units from structural steel support frame using threaded steel rods and vibration isolation springs.

B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around airhandling units for service and maintenance.

3.3 EQUIPMENT BASES

A. Construct concrete equipment pads as follows:

1. Coordinate size of equipment bases with actual unit sizes provided. Construct base 4 inches larger in both directions than the overall dimensions of the supported unit.

2. Form concrete pads with steel channels conforming to ASTM A 36, size and

3.

4.

5.

location as indicated. Miter and weld corner and provide cross bracing. Anchor or key to floor slab. Form concrete pads with framing lumber with form release compounds. Chamfer top edge and corners of pad. Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves to facilitate securing units. Place concrete and allow to cure before installation of units. Use Portland Cement conforming to ASTM C 150, 4,000 psi compressive strength, and normal weight aggregate.

6. Clean exposed steel form in accordance with SSPC Surface Preparation Specifications SP 2 or SP 3 and apply 2 coats of rust-preventative metal primer.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Duct installations and connections are specified in other Division 15 sections. Make final duct connections with flexible connections.

B. Electrical Connections: The following requirements apply:

1. Electrical power wiring is specified in Division 16. 2. Temperature control wiring and interlock wiring is specified in Division 15 Section

Electrical Control Systems." 3. Temperature control wiring and interlock wifing is specified in Division 15 Section

"Pneumatic Control Systems." 4. Grounding: Connect unit components to ground in accordance with the National

Electrical Code.


A. Manufacturer's Field Inspection: Arrange and pay for a factory.- authorized service representative to perform the following:



1. Inspect the field assembly of components and installation of fans including piping, ductwork, and electrical connections.

2. Prepare a written report on findings and recommended corrective actions.

3.6 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Clean unit cabinet interiors to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Vacuum clean fan wheel and cabinet.

3.7 COMMISSIONING

A. Final Checks Before Start-Up: Perform the following operations and checks before startup:

1. Remove shipping, blocking, and bracing. 2. Verify unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections for

piping, ductwork, and electrical are complete. Verify proper thermal overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnects.

3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and

verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearings operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align belts, and install belt guards.

5. Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with factoryrecommended lubricants.

6. Verify manual and automatic volume control and that fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in the full-open position.

7. Disable automatic temperature control operators.

B. Starting procedures for fans:

1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust fan to indicated RPM.

a. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions.

2. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.

C. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature control operators.

D. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for procedures for airhandling-system testing, adjusting, and balancing.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Demonstration Services: Arrange and pay for a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel on the following:


( .)


1. Procedures and schedules related to start-up and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, preventative maintenance, and how to obtain replacement parts.

2. Familiarization with contents of Operating and Maintenance Manuals specified in Division 1 Section "Project Closeout" and Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements. "

B. Schedule training with at least 7 days' advance notice.



METAL DUCTWOI

SECTION 15891- METAL DUCTWORK

PART 1- GENERAL




1. "Basic Mechanical Requirements." 2. "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes rectangular, round, and flat-oval metal ducts and plenums for heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems in pressure classes from minus 2 inches to plus 10 inches water gage.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Sealing Requirements Definitions: For the purposes of duct systems sealing requirements specified in this Section, the following definitions apply:

1. Seams: A seam is defined as joining of two longitudinally (in the direction of airflow) oriented edges of duct surface material occurring between two joints. All other duct surface connections made on the perimeter are deemed to be joints.

2. Joints: Joints include girth joints; branch and subbranch intersections; so-called duct collar tap-ins; fitting subsections; louver and air terminal connections to ducts; access door and access panel frames and jambs; duct, plenum, and casing abutments to building structures.


A. The duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select and size air moving and distribution equipment and other components of the air system. Changes or alterations to the layout or configuration of the duct system must be specifically approved in writing. Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that the proposed layout will provide the original design results without increasing the system total pressure.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes for the following items:


Section 15891- Page 2 of14 METAL DUCTWORK

1. Duct Liner. 2. Sealing Materials. 3. Fire-Stopping Materials.

C. Shop drawings from duct fabrication shop, drawn to a scale not smaller than 1/4 inch equals 1 foot, on drawing sheets same size as the Contract Drawings, detailing:

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation details, including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work.

2. Duct layout, indicating pressure classifications and sizes in plan view. For exhaust ducts systems, indicate the classification of the materials handled as defined in this Section.

3. Fittings. 4. Reinforcing details and spacing. 5. Seam and joint construction details. 6. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions. 7. Terminal unit, coil, and humidifier installations. 8. Hangers and supports, including methods for building attachment, vibration

isolation, and duct attachment.

D. Coordination drawings for ductwork installation in accordance with Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements." In addition to the requirements specified in "Basic Mechanical Requirements" show the following:

1. Coordination with ceiling suspension members. 2. Spatial coordination with other systems installed in the same space with the duct

systems. 3. Coordination of ceiling- and wall-mounted access doors and panels required to

provide access to dampers and other operating devices. 4. Coordination with ceiling-mounted lighting fixtures and air outlets and inlets.

E. Welding certificates including welding procedures specifications, welding procedures qualifications test records, and welders' qualifications test records complying with requirements specified in "Quality Assurance" below.

F. Record drawings including duct systems routing, fittings details, reinforcing, support, and installed accessories and devices, in accordance with Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements" and Division 1.

G. Maintenance data for volume control devices, fire dampers, and smoke dampers, in accordance with Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements" and Division 1.


A. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel" for hangers and supports and AWS D9.1 "Sheet Metal Welding Code."

B. Qualify each welder in accordance with AWS qualification tests for welding processes


\.

METAL DUCTWOI

involved. Certify that their qualification is current.

C. NFPA Compliance: Comply with the following NFPA Standards:

1. NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," except as indicated otherwise.

2. NFPA 96, "Standard for the Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and Grease-Laden Vapors for Commercial Cooking Equipment," Chapter 3, "Duct System," for kitchen hood duct systems, except as indicated otherwise.

D. Field-Constructed Mock-Up: Prior to installation of duct systems erect mock-ups representing duct systems pressure classifications greater than 2 inches. Build mock-ups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work

1. Locate mock-ups on the site. Mock-up may be a representative section of the actual duct system.

2. Include the minimum number of each of the following features and fittings:

a. Five transverse joints. b. One access door. c. Two typical branch connections each with at least one elbow. d. Two typical flexible duct or flexible connector connections for each type duct

and apparatus.

3. Perform tests specified in "Field Quality Control." Modify mock-up construction and perform additional tests as required to achieve specified minimum acceptable results.

4. Obtain approval of mock-ups before beginning final fabrication. 5. Retain and maintain mock-ups during construction in undisturbed condition as a

standard for judging completed unit of Work 6. Demolish and remove mock-ups from Project site when directed. 7. Accepted mock-ups that form a part of the actual duct system may remain and

become part of completed unit of Work


A. Deliver sealant and fire-stopping materials to site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels informing about manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for mUlti-component materials.

B. Store and handle sealant fire-stopping materials in compliance with manufacturers' recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.

C. Deliver and store stainless steel sheets with mill-applied adhesive protective paper, maintained through fabrication and installation.


Section 15891- Page 4 of 14 METAL DUCTWORK

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. Sheet Metal, General: Provide sheet metal in thicknesses indicated, packaged and marked as specified in ASTM A 700.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality, ASTM A 527, Coating Designation G 90. Provide mill phosphatized finish for exposed surfaces of ducts exposed to view.

C. PVC-Coated Galvanized Steel: UL-181 Class 1 Listing. Lock-forming quality galvanized sheet steel with ASTM A 527, Coating Designation G 90. Provide with factory-applied, 4-mil, PVC coating on the exposed surfaces of ducts and fittings (exterior of ducts and fittings for underground applications, and the interior of ducts and fittings for fume-handing applications) and 2-mil PVC coating on the reverse side of the ducts and fittings.

D. Carbon Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366, cold-rolled sheets, commercial quality, with oiled, exposed matte finish.

E. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 480, Type 316, sheet form, with No.4 finish on exposed surface for ducts exposed to view; Type 304, sheet form, with No.1 finish for concealed ducts.

F. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14, sheet form; with standard, one-side bright finish where ducts are exposed to view, and mill finish for concealed ducts.

G. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Unless otherwise indicated, provide galvanized steel reinforcing where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts. For aluminum and stainless steel ducts provide reinforcing of compatible materials.

H. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for 36-inch length or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.2 DUCT LINER

A. General: Comply with NFPA Standard 90A and TIMA StandardAHC-l01.

8. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type II, with coated surface exposed to airstream to prevent erosion of glass fibers.

1. Thickness: ,1/2 inch. 2. Thickness: 1 inch. 3. Thickness: 1-1/2 inch. 4. Density: 1-1/2 pounds. 5. Density: 2 pounds. 6. Density: 3 pounds. 7. Thermal Performance: "K-Factor" equal to 0.28 or better, at a mean temperature

of75 deg F. 8. Fire Hazard Classification: Flame spread rating of not more than 25 without


METAL DUCTWOI

evidence of continued progressive combustion and a smoke developed rating of no higher than 50, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 411.

9. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA Standard 90A and ASTM C 916. 10. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment,

mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct. Provide fasteners that do not damage the liner when applied as recommended by the manufacturer, that do not cause leakage in the duct, and will indefinitely sustain a 50-pound tensile dead load test perpendicular to the duct wall.

a. Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation, and without projecting more than 1/8 inch into the airstream.

b. Adhesive For Attachment of Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with the "Fire Hazard Classification" of duct liner system.

2.3 SEALING MATERIALS

A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term sealant used here is not limited to materials of adhesive or mastic nature, but also includes tapes and combinations of open weave fabric strips and mastics.

B. Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches wide, glass-fiber-fabric reinforced.

C. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with a gypsum mineral compound and a modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with the tape to form a hard, durable, airtight seal.

D. Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl sealant complying with FS TT-S-001657, Type I; formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.

E. Flanged Joint Mastics: One-part, acid-curing, silicone elastomeric joint sealants, complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.

2.4 FIRE-STOPPING

A. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers" for fire-stopping.

2.5 FIRE-STOPPING

A. Fire-Resistant Sealant: Provide two-part, foamed-in-place, fire-stopping silicone sealant formulated for use in a through-penetration fire-stop system for filling openings around duct penetrations through walls and floors, having fire-resistance ratings indicated as established by testing identical assemblies per ASTM E 814 by Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Fire-Resistant Sealant: Provide one-part elastomeric sealant formulated for use in a through-penetration fire-stop system for filling openings around duct penetrations through walls and floors, having fire-resistance ratings indicated as established by testing identical assemblies per ASTM E 814 by Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.



C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. "Dow Corning Fire Stop Foam"; Dow Corning Corp. 2. "Pensil851"; General Electric Co. 3. "Dow Corning Fire Stop Sealant"; Dow Corning Corp. 4. "3M Fire Barrier Caulk CP-25"; Electrical Products Div./3M. 5. "RTV 7403"; General Electric Co. 6. "Fyre Putty"; Standard Oil Engineered Materials Co.

2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder actuated fasteners, or structural steel fasteners appropriate for building materials. Do not use powder actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

B. Hangers: Galvanized sheet steel, or round, uncoated steel, threaded rod.

1. Hangers Installed In Corrosive Atmospheres: Electro-galvanized, all-thread rod or hot-dipped-galvanized rods with threads painted after installation.

2. Straps and Rod Sizes: Conform with Table 4-1 in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, 1985 Edition, for sheet steel width and gage and steel rod diameters.

C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.

D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes conforming to ASTM A 36.

1. Where galvanized steel ducts are installed, provide hot-dipped-galvanized steel shapes and plates.

2. For stainless steel ducts, provide stainless steel support materials. 3. For aluminum ducts, provide aluminum support materials, except where materials

are electrolytically separated from ductwork.

2.7 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate rectangular ducts with galvanized sheet steel, in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Tables 1-3 through 1-19, including their associated details. Conform to the requirements in the referenced standard for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie rod applications, and joint types and intervals. 1. Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity

class required for pressure classification. 2. Provide materials that are free from visual imperfections such as pitting, seam

marks, roller marks, stains, and discolorations.


j I

\

B.

METAL DUCTWOI

Fabricate kitchen hood exhaust ducts with 16-gage, carbon steel sheets for concealed ducts and 18-gage stainless steels for exposed ducts. Weld and flange seams and joints. Conform to NFPA Standard 96.

C. Fabricate dishwasher hood exhaust ducts with 18-gage stainless steels. Weld and flange seams and joints.

D. Acid-Resistant Ducts: Provide factory-fabricated ducts and fittings only; no shop or field fabrication will be allowed. Refer to PVC-Coated Galvanized Steel Sheets in this Section for materials.

E. Static Pressure Classifications: Except where otherwise indicated, construct duct systems to the following pressure classifications:

1. Supply Ducts: 3 inches water gage. 2. Return Ducts: 2 inches water gage, negative pressure. 3. Exhaust Ducts: 2 inches water gage, negative pressure.

F. Crossbreaking or Cross Beading: Crossbreak or bead duct sides that are 19 inches and larger and are 20 gage or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of unbraced panel area, as indicated in SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standard," Figure 1-4, unless they are lined or are externally insulated.

2.8 RECTANGULAR DUCT FITTINGS

A. Fabricate elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other duct construction in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Metal Duct Construction Standard," 1985 Edition, Figures 2-1 through 2-10.

2.9 SHOP APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS

A. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with 90 percent coverage of adhesive at liner contact surface area. Multiple layers of insulation to achieve indicated thickness is prohibited.

B. Apply a coat of adhesive to liner facing in direction of airflow not receiving metal nosing.

C. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.

D. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to assure butted edge overlapping.

E. Longitudinal joints in rectangular ducts shall not occur except at corners of ducts, unless the size of the duct and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary.

1. Apply an adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts exceeding 2,500 FPM air velocity.

F. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not


Section 15891- Page 8 of14 METAL DUCTWORK

2.10

exceeding 12 inches transversely around perimeter; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches longitudinally.

G. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that are either channel or "z" profile or are integrally formed from the duct wall at the following locations:

H.

1.

A.

1. Fan discharge. 2. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct. 3. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts.

Secure insulation liner with perforated sheet metal liner of the same gage specified for the duct, secured to ducts with mechanical fasteners that maintain metal liner distance from duct without compressing insulation. Provide 3j32-inch-diameter perforations, with an overall open area of 23 percent.

Terminate liner with duct buildouts installed in ducts to attach dampers, turning vane assemblies, and other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to the duct wall with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds. Terminate liner at fire dampers at connection to fire damper sleeve through fire separation.

ROUND AND FLAT OVAL DUCT FABRICATION

General: "Basic Round Diameter" as used in this article is the diameter of the size of round duct that has a circumference equal to the perimeter of a given sized of flat oval duct. Except where interrupted by fittings, provide round and flat oval ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet.

B. Round Ducts: Fabricate round supply ducts with spiral lockseam construction, except where diameters exceed 72 inches. Fabricate ducts having diameters greater than 72 inches with longitudinal butt"welded seams. Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Table 3-2 for galvanized steel gages.

C. Round Ducts: Fabricate round supply ducts using seam types identified in SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," 1985 Edition, Figure 3-1, RL-1, RL-4, or RL-5. Seams Types RL-2 or RL-3 may be used if spot-welded on 1-inch intervals. Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Table 3-2 for galvanized steel gages.

D. Flat Oval Ducts: Fabricate flat oval supply ducts with standard spirallockseams (without intermediate ribs) or with butt-welded longitudinal seams in gages listed in SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Table 3-4. .

E. Double-Wall (Insulated) Ducts: Fabricate double-wall insulated ducts with an outer shell, insulation, and an inner liner as specified below. Dimensions indicated on internally insulated ducts are nominal inside dimensions.

1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 Btujsq.ft.jdeg F jinch thickness at 75 deg F mean temperature.

2. Outer Shell: Base outer shell gage on actual outer shell dimensions. Provide outer


2.11

A.

B.

c.

METAL DUCTWOI

shell lengths 2 inches longer than inner shell and insulation, and in gages specified above for single-wall duct.

3. Insulation: Unless otherwise indicated, provide l-inch-thick fiber-glass insulation. Provide insulation ends where internally insulated duct connects to single-wall duct or noninsulated components. The insulation end shall terminate the insulation and reduce the outer shell diameter to the inner liner diameter.

4. Solid Inner Liner: Construct round and flat oval inner liners with solid sheet metal of the gages listed below. For flat oval ducts, the diameter indicated in the table below is the "basic round diameter."

5. Perforated Inner Liner: Construct round and flat oval inner liners with perforated sheet metal of the gages listed below. Provide 3/32-inch-diameter perforations, with an overall open area of 23 percent. For flat oval ducts, the diameter indicated below is the "basic round diameter."

a. 3 to 8 inches: 28 gage with standard spiral construction. b. 9 to 42 inches: 28 gage with single-rib spiral construction. c. 44 to 60 inches: 26 gage with single-rib spiral construction. d. 62 to 88 inches: 22 gage with standard spiral construction.

6. Maintain concentricity of liner to outer shell by mechanical means. Retain insulation from dislocation by mechanical means.

ROUND AND FLAT OVAL SUPPLY AND EXHAUST FITTINGS FABRICATION

90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to conform to SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," 1985 Edition, Figures 3-4 and 3-5 and with metal thicknesses specified for longitudinal seam straight duct.

Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with a reduced entrance to branch taps with no excess material projecting from the body onto branch tap entrance.

Elbows: Fabricate in die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Fabricate the bend radius of die-formed, gored, and pleated elbows 1.5 times the elbow diameter. Unless elbow construction type is indicated, provide elbows meeting the following requirements:

1. Mitered Elbows: Fabricate mitered elbows with welded construction in gages specified below.

a. Mitered Elbows Radius and Number of Pieces: Unless otherwise indicated, construct elbow to comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Table 3-1. .

b. Round Mitered Elbows: Solid welded and with metal thickness listed below for pressure classes from minus 2 inches to plus 2 inches:

1) 3 to 26 inches: 24 gage. 2) 27 to 36 inches: 22 gage. 3) 37 to 50 inches: 20 gage. 4) 52 to 60 inches: 18 gage. 5) 62 to 84 inches: 16 gage.



2.

3.

4.

5.

6. 7. 8.

c. Round Mitered Elbows: Solid welded and with metal thickness listed below for pressure classes from 2 inches to 10 inches:

1) 3 to 14 inches: 24 gage. 2) 15 to 26 inches: 22 gage. 3) 27 to 50 inches: 20 gage. 4) 52 to 60 inches: 18 gage. 5) 62 to 84 inches: 16 gage.

d. Flat Oval Mitered Elbows: Solid welded and with the same metal thickness as longitudinal seam flat oval duct.

e. 90-Degree, 2-Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems, or exhaust systems for material handling classes A and B; and only where space restrictions do not permit the use of 1.5 bend radius elbows. Fabricate with a single-thickness turning vanes.

Round Elbows - 8 Inches and Smaller: Die-formed elbows for 45- and 90-degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate nonstandard bend angle configurations or 1/2-inch-diameter (e.g. 3-1/2- and 4-1/2-inch) elbows with gored construction. Round Elbows - 9 Through 14 Inches: Gored or pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees, except where space restrictions require a mitered elbow. Fabricate nonstandard bend angle configurations or 1/2-inch-diameter (e.g. 9-1/2- and 10-1/2-inch) elbows with gored construction. Round Elbows - Larger Than 14 Inches and All Flat Oval Elbows: Gored elbows, except where space restrictions require a mitered elbow. Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes Through 8 Inches and All Pressures: 20 gage with 2-piece welded construction. Round Gored Elbows Gages: Same as for nonelbow fittings specified above. Flat Oval Elbows Gages: Same as longitudinal seam flat oval duct. Pleated Elbows Sizes Through 14 Inches and Pressures Through 10 Inches: 26 gage.

D. Double-Wall (Insulated) Fittings: Fabricate double-wall insulated fittings with an outer shell, insulation, and an inner liner as specified below. Dimensions indicated on internally insulated ducts are nominal inside dimensions.

1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 Btu/sq.ft./deg F/inch thickness at 75 deg F mean temperature.

2. Outer Shell: Base outer shell gage on actual outer shell dimensions. Provide outer shell lengths 2 inches longer than inner shell and insulation. Gages for outer shell shall be same as for uninsulated fittings specified above.

3. Insulation: Unless otherwise indicated, provide l-inch-thick fiber-glass insulation. Provide insulation ends where internally insulated duct connects to single-wall duct or noninsulated components. The insulation end shall terminate the insulation and reduce the outer shell diameter to the nominal single-wall size.

4. Solid Inner Liner: Construct round and flat oval inner liners with solid sheet metal of the gages listed below. For flat oval ducts, the diameter indicated in the table below is the "basic round diameter."


METAL DUCTWOI

5. Perforated Inner Liner: Construct round and flat oval inner liners with perforated sheet metal of the gages listed below. Provide 3/32-inch-diameter perforations, with an overall open area of 23 percent. For flat oval ducts, the diameter indicated in the table below is the "basic round diameter."

a. 3 to 34 inches: 24 gage. b. 35 to 58 inches: 22 gage. c. 60 to 88 inches: 20 gage.

6. Maintain concentricity of liner to outer shell by mechanical means. Retain insulation from dislocation by mechanical means.

E. PVC-Coated Elbows and Fittings: Fabricate elbows and fittings as follows:

1. Round Elbows 4 to 8 Inches: 2-piece, die stamped, with longitudinal seams spot welded, bonded, and painted with a PVC aerosol spray.

2. Round Elbows 9 to 26 Inches: Standing seam construction. 3. Round Elbows 28 to 60 Inches: Standard gore construction, riveted and bonded. 4. Other Fittings: Riveted and bonded joints. 5. Couplings: Slip-joint construction with a minimum of a 2-inch insertion length.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Duct System Pressure Class: Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure classification indicated.

B. Install ducts with the fewest possible joints.

C. Use fabricated fittings for all changes in directions, changes in size and shape, and connections.

D. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with projections into duct at connections kept to a minimum.

E. Locate ducts, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, parallel and perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs. Install duct systems in shortest route that does not obstruct useable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment.

F. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.

G. Provide clearance of 1 inch where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of ducts, plus allowance for insulation thickness, if any.

H. Install insulated ducts with i-inch clearance outside of insulation.



I. Conceal ducts from view in finished and occupied spaces by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction, or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as specifically shown.

J. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work.

K. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ductwork to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.

L. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass interior partitions and exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same gage as duct. Overlap opening on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.

3.2 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING

A. General: Seal duct seams and joints as follows:

B. Pressure Classifications Greater Than 3 Inches Water Gage: All transverse joints, longitudinal seams, and duct penetrations.

C. Pressure Classification 2 and 3 Inches Water Gage: All transverse joints and longitudinal seams.

1. Pressure Classification Less than 2 Inches Water Gage: Transverse joints only.

D. Seal externally insulated ducts prior to insulation installation.

3.3 HANGING AND SUPPORTING

A. Install rigid round, rectangular, and flat oval metal duct with support systems indicated in SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Tables 4-1 through 4-3 and Figures 4-1 through 4-8.

B. Support horizontal ducts within 2 feet of each elbow and within 4 feet of each branch intersection.

C. Support vertical ducts at a maximum interval of 16 feet and at each floor.

D. Upper attachments to structures shall have an allowable load not exceeding 1/4 of the failure (proof test) load but are not limited to the specific methods indicated.

E. Install concrete insert prior to placing concrete.

F. Install powder actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Equipment Connections: Connect equipment with flexible connectors in accordance with Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."


c· .

METAL DUCTWOI

B. Branch Connections: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Figures 2-7 and 2-8.

C. Outlet and Inlet Connections: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Figures 2-16 through 2-18.

D. Terminal Units Connections: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Figure 2-19.


A. The Owner will contract with an independent testing agency to perform, record, and report leakage tests.

B. Remake leaking joints as required and apply sealants to achieve specified maximum allowable leakage.


A. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of the systems as required to accommodate leakage testing, and as required for compliance with test requirements.

B. Conduct tests, in the presence of the Architect, at static pressures equal to the maximum design pressure of the system or the section being tested. If pressure classifications are not indicated, test entire system at the maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above the maximum design operating pressure. Give 7 days' advanced notice for testing.

C. Determine leakage from entire system or section of the system by relating leakage to the surface area of the test section.

D. Maximum Allowable Leakage: As described in ASHRAE 1989 Handbook, "Fundamentals" Volume, Chapter 32, Table 6 and Figure 10. Comply with requirements for leakage classification 3 for round and flat oval ducts, leakage classification 12 for rectangular ducts in pressure classifications less than and equal to 2 inches water gage (both positive and negative pressures), and leakage classification 6 for pressure classifications greater than 2 inches water gage and less than and equal to 10 inches water gage.

E. Remake leaking joints as required and apply sealants to achieve specified maximum allowable leakage.

F. Leakage Test: Perform volumetric measurements and adjust air systems as described in ASHRAE 1987 "HVAC Systems and Applications" Volume, Chapter 57 and ASHRAE 1989 "Fundamentals" Volume, Chapter 13, and Division 15 Section "TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING."


A. Adjust volume control devices as required by the testing and balancing procedures to



achieve required air flow. Refer to Division 15 Section "TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING" for requirements and procedures for adjusting and balancing air systems.

B. Vacuum ducts systems prior to final acceptance to remove dust and debris.



DUCT ACCESSORI

SECTION 15910 - DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1- GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Backdraft dampers. 2. Manual volume control dampers. 3. Fire and smoke dampers. 4. Actuators. 5. Turning vanes. 7. Duct-mounted access doors and panels. 8. Flexible connectors. 9. Flexible ducts. 10. Accessories hardware.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 8 Section "Access Doors" for ceiling- and wall-mounted access panels and doors.

2. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for louvers installed in walls, connected to duct systems.

3. Division 15 Section "Air Outlets and Inlets" for diffusers, registers, and grilles. 4. Division 15 Section "Air Terminals" for constant and variable air volume units. 5. Division 15 Section "Electric Control Systems" for electric dampers actuators. 6. Division 15 Section "Pneumatic Control Systems" for electric and pneumatic

dampers actuators. 7. Division 15 Section "Direct Digital Controls" for electric and pneumatic dampers

actuators. 8. Division 16 Section "Fire Alarm Systems" for duct-mounted fire and smoke

detectors.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data including details for materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes for the following items:


Section 15910 - Page 2 of 10 DUCT ACCESSORIES

1. Backdraft dampers. 2. Manual volume control dampers. 3. Fire and smoke dampers. 4. Duct-mounted access panels and doors. 5. Duct silencers. 6. Flexible ducts.

C. Shop drawings from manufacturer detailing assemblies. Include dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Detail the following:

1. Special fittings and volume control damper installation (both manual and automatic) details.

2. Fire and smoke damper installations, including sleeves and duct-mounted access door and panel installations.

D. Product Certification: Submit certified test data on dynamic insertion loss; self-noise power levels; and airflow performance data, static pressure loss, and dimensions and weights.


A. NFPA Compliance: Comply with the following NFPA Standards:

1. NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."

2. NFPA 90B, "Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.

1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS

A. Description: Suitable for horizontal or vertical installation.

B. Frame: 1S-gage galvanized steel, with welded corners and mounting flange.

C. Frame: 1S-gage galvanized steel, with welded corners.

D. Frame: 0.063-inch-thick 6063T extruded aluminum, with mounting flange.


( \,

DUCT ACCESSORI

E. Frame: O.063-inch-thick 6063T extruded aluminum.

F. Blades: O.02S-inch-thick roll-formed aluminum.

G. Blades: O.OSO-inch-thick 6063T extruded aluminum.

H. Blade Seals: Felt.

I. Blade Seals: Vinyl.

J. Blade Seals: Neoprene.

K. Blade Axles: Nonferrous.

L. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.

M. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.

N. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

O. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.

P. Chain Operator: 1S-foot-Iong galvanized-steel sash chain and pulley.

Q. Wing-Nut Operator: Galvanized steel, with 1j4-inch galvanized-steel rod.

2.2 MANUAL VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS

A. General: Provide factory-fabricated volume-control dampers, complete with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper blades to provide stability under operating conditions. Provide locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent with pressure class. Provide end bearings or other seals for ducts with pressure classifications of 3 inches or higher. Extend axles full length of damper blades. Provide bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

B. Standard Volume Control Dampers: MUltiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade design as indicated, standard leakage rating, with linkage outside of air stream, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.

C. Standard Volume Control Dampers: MUltiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade design as indicated, standard leakage rating, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.

1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized-steel channels, minimum of 16 gage, and with mitered and welded corners. Provide frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls. Provide flangeless frames where indicated for installation in ducts.

2. Aluminum Frames: Hat-shaped, O.063-inch-thick, 6063T extruded aluminum channels. Provide frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls.



Provide flangeless frames where indicated for installation in ducts. 3. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 16-gage galvanized steel. 4. Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.02S-inch-thick roll-formed aluminum. 5. Extruded Aluminum Blades: O.OSO-inch-thick 6063T extruded aluminum. 6. Blade Axles: Nonferrous. 7. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. S. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum. 9. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

D. Low-Leakage Volume Control Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade design as indicated, low-leakage rating, with linkage outside of air stream, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.

E. Low-Leakage Volume Control Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade design as indicated, low-leakage rating, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.


2. Aluminum Frames: Hat-shaped, 0.063-inch-thick, 6063T extruded aluminum channels. Provide frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls. Provide flangeless frames where indicated for installation in ducts.

3. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 16-gage galvanized steel. 4. Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.02S-inch-thick roll-formed aluminum. 5. Extruded Aluminum Blades: O.OSO-inch-thick 6063T extruded aluminum. 6. Blade Seals: Felt. 7. Blade Seals: Vinyl. S. Blade Seals: Neoprene. 9. Blade Axles: Nonferrous. 10. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 11. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum. 12. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

F. High-Performance Volume Control Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade design as indicated, low-leakage rating, with linkage outside of air stream, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.


2. Aluminum Frames: Hat-shaped, 0.12S-inch-thick, 6063T extruded aluminum channels. Provide frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls. Provide flangeless frames where indicated for installation in ducts.

3. Steel Blades: lS-gage, airfoil-shaped, galvanized steel. 4. Extruded Aluminum Blades: O.OSl-inch-thick minimum, 6063T extruded

aluminum. 5. Blade Seals: Dual-durometer vinyl on blade edges; metallic compression on jambs.


) !

DUCT ACCESSOR)

6. Blade Axles: Nonferrous. 7. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum. 9. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

G. Jackshaft: l-inch-diameter, galvanized-steel pipe rotating within a pipe bearing assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple damper assemblies. Provide appropriate length and number of mounting to connect linkage of each damper of a multiple damper assembly.

H. Damper Control Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with a heavy-gage dial and handle made of 3/32-inch-thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut. Provide center hole to suit damper operating rod size. Provide elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.

2.3 FIRE DAMPERS

A. General: UL labeled according to UL Standard 555 "Standard for Fire Dampers." Refer to Fire Damper Schedule atthe end of this Section.

B. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 or 3 hours, as indicated.

C. Frame: Type A or Type B; fabricated with roll-formed, 21-gage, galvanized-steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.

D. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed or field-installed galvanized steel.

1. Minimum Thickness: O.056-inch (16-gage) or O.138-inch (10-gage) thick as indicated, and length to suit application.

2. Exceptions: Omit sleeve where damper frame width permits direct attachment of perimeter mounting angles on each side of the wall or floor, and thickness of damper frame meets sleeve requirements.

E. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.

F. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 21-gage galvanized steel. In place of interlocking blades, provide full-length, 21-gage, galvanized-steel blade connectors.

G. Horizontal Dampers: Include a blade lock and stainless steel negator closure spring.

H. Fusible Link: Replaceable, 165 deg F or 212 deg F rated as indicated.

2.4 CEILING FIRE DAMPERS

A. General: UL listed and labeled; comply with the construction details for the tested floor/roof-ceiling assemblies as indicated in the UL Fire Resistance Directory.

B. Frame: 20-gage, rectangular or round, galvanized steel; style to suit ceiling construction.

C. Blades: 22-gage galvanized steel with nonasbestos refractory insulation.



D. Volume Control Adjustment: Provide UL-Iabeled, fusible volume control adjustment.

E. Fusible Link: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated.

F. Fusible Link: Replaceable, 212 deg F rated.

G. Fusible Link: Replaceable, 285 deg F rated.

2.5 SMOKE DAMPERS

A. General: UL-Iabeled according to UL Standard 555S, "Standard for Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems." Combination fire and smoke dampers shall also be UL-Iabeled for 1-1/2 hour rating according to UL Standard 555 "Standard for Fire Dampers." Refer to the Smoke Damper Schedule at the end of this Section for leakage classification, temperature category, and other characteristics.

B. Fusible Link: Replaceable, 165 deg F or 212 deg F rated as indicated.

C. Frame and Blades: 16-gage galvanized steel.

D. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 18-gage galvanized steel, length to suit wall or floor application.

2.6 ACTUATORS

A. Damper Motors: Provide motors for smooth modulating or 2-position action.

1. Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: Provide with oil-immersed and sealed gear trains.

2. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where indicated. Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 inch-pounds and breakaway torque rating of 150 inch-pounds.

3. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outside Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets designed to make motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal heaters to permit normal operation at minus 40 deg F (minus 40 deg C).

4. Non-Spring Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 square feet, size motor for running torque rating of 150 inch-pounds and breakaway torque rating of 300 inch-pounds.

5. 2-Position Motor: 115 V, single phase, 60 Hz. 6. 2-Position Motor: 230 V, single phase, 60 Hz. 7. 2-Position Motor: 230 V, 3 phase, 60 Hz. 8. 2-Position Motor: 460 V, 3 phase, 60 Hz. 9. Modulating, Spring Return Motor: 115 V, single phase, 60 Hz. 10. Modulating, Spring Return Motor: 230 V, single phase, 60 Hz. 11. Modulating, Spring Return Motor: 230 V, 3 phase, 60 Hz. 12. Modulating, Spring Return Motor: 460 V, 3 phase, 60 Hz.

2.7 TURNING VANES


DUCT ACCESSORI

A. Fabricate turning vanes according to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Figures 2-2 through 2-7.

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate of 1-1/2-inch-wide, curved blades set at 3/4 inch on center, support with bars perpendicular to blades set at 2 inches on center, and set into side strips suitable for mounting in ducts.

C. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate of airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fiber glass fill.

2.8 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

A. General: Refer to the Access Door Materials Schedule at the end of this Section for frame and door thickness, number of hinges and locks, and location of locks. Provide construction and airtightness suitable for duct pressure class.

B. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel. Provide with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.

C. Door: Double-wall, galvanized sheet metal construction with insulation fill and thickness, number of hinges and locks as indicated for duct pressure class. Provide vision panel where indicated. Provide l-inch by l-inch butt hinge or piano hinge and cam latches.

D. Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam rubber seals.

E. Insulation: l-inch thick fiber glass or polystyrene foam board.

2.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. General: Flame-retarded or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying with UL Standard 181, Class 1.

B. Standard Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory-fabricated with a strip of fabric 3-1/2 inches wide attached to 2 strips of 2-3/4-inch-wide, 24-gage, galvanized sheet steel or O.032-gage aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with connected duct system. Fold and crimp metal edge strips onto fabric as illustrated in SMACNA HVAC Duct Standard, 1st Edition, Figure 2-19.

C. Extra-Wide Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory-fabricated with a strip of fabric 5-3/4 inches wide attached to 2 strips of 2-3/4-inch-wide, 24-gage, galvanized sheet steel or O.032-gage alumipum sheets. Select metal compatible with connected duct system. Fold and crimp metal edge strips onto fabric as illustrated in SMACNA HVAC Duct Standard, 1st Edition, Figure 2-19.

D. Transverse Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory-fabricated with a strip of fabric 3-1/2 inches wide attached to 2 strips of 4-3/8-inch-wide, 24-gage, galvanized sheet steel or O.032-gage aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with connected duct system. Fold and crimp metal edge strips onto fabric as illustrated in SMACNA HVAC Duct Standard, 1st Edition, Figure 2-19.



2.10

E. Conventional, Indoor System Flexible Connectors Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with polychloroprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz. per sq yd. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lb per inch in the warp and 360 Ib per inch in the filling.

F. Conventional, Outdoor System Flexible Connectors Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with Du Pont's HYPALON or other synthetic-rubber weatherproof coating resistant to the sun's ultraviolet rays and ozone environment.

A.

B.

c.

D.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz. per sq yd. 2. Tensile Strength: 530 lb per inch in the warp and 440 lb per inch in the filling. 3. High-Temperature System Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric coated with silicone

rubber and having a minimum weight of 16 oz. per sq yd and tensile strength of 285 lb per inch in the warp, and 185 lb per inch in the filling.

4. High-Corrosive-Environment System Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric coated with a chemical-resistant coating.

5. Minimum Weight: 14 oz. per sq yd. 6. Tensile Strength: 450 lb per inch in the warp and 340 lb per inch in the filling.

FLEXIBLE DUCTS

General: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

Flexible Ducts - Uninsulated: Spiral-wound steel spring with flameproof vinyl sheathing.

Flexible Ducts - Uninsulated: Corrugated aluminum.

Flexible Ducts - Insulated: Factory-fabricated, insulated, round duct, with an outer jacket enclosing 1-1/2-inch-thick, glass fiber insulation around a continuous inner liner.

1. Reinforcement: Steel-wire helix encapsulated in the inner liner. 2. Outer Jacket: Glass-reinforced, silver mylar with a continuous hanging tab,

integral fiber glass tape, and nylon hanging cord. 3. Outer Jacket: Polyethylene film. 4. Inner Liner: Polyethylene film.

2.11 ACCESSORIES HARDWARE

A.

8.

c.

Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket and a flat mounting gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and provide in length to suit duct insulation thickness.

Splitter Damper Accessories: Zinc-plated damper blade bracket, 1/4-inch, zinc-plated operating rod, and a duct-mounted, ball-joint bracket with flat rubber gasket and square-head set screw.

Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action. Provide in sizes from 3 to 18 inches to suit duct size.


DUCT ACCESSORI

D. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof and resistant to gasoline and grease.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of duct accessories. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to manufacturer's installation instructions and applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards.

B. Install volume control dampers in lined duct with methods to avoid damage to liner and to avoid erosion of duct liner.

C. Provide test holes at fan inlet and outlet and elsewhere as indicated.

D. Install fire and smoke dampers according to the manufacturer's UL-approved printed instructions.

E. Install fusible links in fire dampers.

F. Label access doors according to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.

B. Adjust fire and smoke dampers for proper action.

C. Final positioning of manual dampers is specified in Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing."

FIRE DAMPER SCHEDULE

DWG ID

FIRE RATING

MOUNTING ORIENT

CEILING FIRE DAMPER SCHEDULE

DWG ID

FIRE RATING

FRAME EXTENSION

SMOKE DAMPER SCHEDULE

FRAME STYLE

SLEEVE GAGE

FUSIBLE LINK RATING

FUSIBLE LINK RATING

VOLUME CONTROL SHAPE



FUSIBLE DWG FIRE LEAKAGE TEMP LINK ACTUATOR MOUNT ID RATING CLASS CATEGORY RATING TYPE ORIENT

ACCESS DOOR MATERIALS SCHEDULE

DOOR NUMBER DUCT PRESSURE CLASS

SIZE OF NUMBER OF INCHES HINGES LOCKS

2 INCHES 12X12 2 1-S &LESS 16x20 2 2-S

24X24 3 2-S

3INCHES 12X12 2 1-S 16X20 2 1-S,l-T,l-B 24X24 3 2-S,l-T,l-B

4TO 10 12X12 2 1-S,l-T,l-B INCHES 16X20 3 2-S,l-T,l-B

24X24 3 2-S,2-T,2-B

S: SIDE T: TOP B: BOTTOM



METAL GAGE FRAME DOOR

24 26 22 24 22 22

22 22 20 20 20 20

20 20 20 18 18 18

BACK

26 26 26

26 26 24

26 24 24

... ) I

( .)

AIR OUTLETS AND INLE

SECTION 15932 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

PART 1- GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. Extent of air outlets and inlets work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section.

B. Types of outlets and inlets required for project include the following:

1. Ceiling air diffusers. 2. Wall registers and grilles. 3. Louvers.

C. Refer to other Division-1S sections for ductwork and duct accessories required in conjunction with air outlets and inlets; not work of this section.

D. Refer to other Division-1S sections for balancing of air outlets and inlets; not work of this section.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air outlets and inlets of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Codes and Standards:

1. ARI Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ARI 650 "Standard for Air Outlets and Inlets".

2. ASHRAE Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ASHRAE 70 "Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets".

3. ADC Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in certified laboratories under requirements of ADC 1062 "Certification, Rating and Test Manual".

4. ADC Seal: Provide air outlets and inlets bearing ADC Certified Rating Seal. 5. AMCA Compliance: Test and rate louvers in accordance with AMCA 500 "Test

Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters". 6. AMCA Seal: Provide louvers bearing AMCA Certified Rating Seal. 7. NFPA Compliance: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with NFPA 90A

"Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems".


Section 15932 - Page 2 of8 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

1.4 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for air outlets and inlets including the following:

1. Schedule of air outlets and inlets indicating drawing designation, room location, number furnished, model number, size, and accessories furnished.

2. Data sheet for each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicating construction, finish, and mounting details.

3. Performance data for each type of air outlet and inlet furnished, including aspiration ability, temperature and velocity traverses; throw and drop; and noise criteria ratings. Indicate selections on data.

B. Samples: 3 samples of each type of finish furnished.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawing for each type of air outlet and inlet, indicating materials and methods of assembly of components.

D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data, including cleaning instructions for finishes, and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manuals; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. Deliver air outlets and inlets wrapped in factory-fabricated fiber-board type containers. Identify on outside of container type of outlet or inlet and location to be installed. Avoid crushing or bending and prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in devices.

B. Store air outlets and inlets in original cartons and protect from weather and construction work traffic. Where possible, store indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CEILING AIR DIFFUSERS:

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard ceiling air diffusers where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as indicated, and as required for complete installation.

B. Performance: Provide ceiling air diffusers that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in manufacturer's current data.

C. Ceiling Compatibility: Provide diffusers with border styles that are compatible with adjacent ceiling systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into ceiling module with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of ceiling systems which will contain each type of ceiling air diffuser.



D. Types: Provide ceiling diffusers of type, capacity, and with accessories and finishes as listed on diffuser schedule. The following requirements shall apply to nomenclature indicated on schedule.

1. Diffuser Faces:

a. Round (RD): Round housing, core of concentric rings, round duct connection.

b. Half-Round (H-R): Semi-circular housing, core of concentric half-rings, rectangular duct connection.

c. Square (SQ): Square housing, core of square concentric louvers, square or round duct connection.

d. Rectangular (RCT): Rectangular housing, core of rectangular concentric louvers, square or round duct connection.

e. Panel (PL): Square or rectangular housing extended to form a panel to fit in ceiling system module, core of square or rectangular concentric louvers, square or round duct connection.

f. Perforated (PR): Round, square, or rectangular housing covered with removable perforated panel in frame. Conceal air pattern devices above panel.

g. Linear (LR): Extruded aluminum continuous slot, single or multiple.

2. Diffuser Mountings:

a. Stepped-Down (S-D): Diffuser housing below ceiling with perimeter flange and gasket to seal against ceiling construction.

b. Flush (FL): Diffuser housing above ceiling surface with flush perimeter flange and gasket to seal against ceiling.

c. Lay-In (L-I): Diffuser housing sized to fit between ceiling exposed suspension tee bars and rest on top surface of tee bar.

d. Snap-In (S-I): Diffuser housing sized to fit between ceiling concealed suspension runners, and snap into runners.

3. Diffuser Patterns:

a. Fixed (FX): Fixed position core with concentric rings or louvers for radial air flow around entire perimeter of diffuser.

b. 2 Position (2-P): Manual 2-position core with concentric rings or louvers, upper position for horizontal air flow, lower position for vertical air flow.

c. Adjustable (ADD: Manual adjustable core with concentric rings or louvers, fully ;ldjustable for horizontal to vertical air flow.

d. Supply and Return (S & R): 2-section core, center position for return, perimeter for supply.

e. 1 Way (l-W): Fixed louver face for i-direction air flow, direction indicated on drawings.

f. 2 Way (2-W): Fixed louver face for 2-direction air flow, directions indicated on drawings.

g. 3 Way (3-W): Fixed louver face for 3-direction air flow, directions indicated on drawings.



h. 4 Way (4-W): Fixed louver face for 4-direction air flow, directions indicated on drawings.

i. Induction (lND): Internal aspirator designed to mix air drawn into center core with conditioned air.

j. Rearrangeable Core (R-C): Modular directional core which can be rearranged for selected air pattern.

4. Diffuser Dampers:

a. Opposed Blade (0-B): Adjustable opposed blade damper assembly, key operated from face of diffuser.

b. Butterfly (BTFY): Two semicircular flaps connected to linkage adjustable from face of diffuser with key, and with straightening grid.

c. Supply and Return (S & R): For supply and return diffusers, butterfly type damper in return neck, annular adjustable dampers in supply duct.

d. Integral (ITGL): Combination volume control and pattern adjustment for linear diffusers.

e. Fire Damper (F-D): Combination adjustable opposed blade damper and fusable link fire damper with UL approved link and assembly designed to meet requirements of NFPA 90A.

5. Diffuser Accessories:

a. Equalizing Deflectors (E-D): Adjustable parallel blades in frame for straightening air flow.

b. Smudge Ring (S-R): Extension perimeter frame around diffuser, sized so induced air impinges on frame and not on ceiling.

c. Plaster Ring (P-R): Perimeter ring designed to act as a plaster stop and diffuser anchor.

d. Extractor (EXTR): Curved blades mounted on adjustable frame to produce air scooping action in duct at diffuser take-off.

e. Blank-Off Baffles (B-O-B-): Arc segments designed to fit into diffuser housing to divert air flow from impinging on obstruction.

f. Operating Keys (OP-KY): Tools designed to fit through diffuser face and operate volume control device and/or pattern adjustment.

6. Diffuser Finishes:

a. Aluminum Enamel (A-E): Air-dried aluminum enamel prime finish. b. White Enamel (W-E): Semi-gloss white enamel prime finish. c. Aluminum Anodize (A-A): Aluminum etched and anodized, covered with

clearJacquer finish.

E. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering diffusers which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

F. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide diffusers of one of the following:



1. Anemostat Products Div.; Dymanics Corp. of America. 2. Cranes Co.; Div. of Wehr Corp. 3. Krueger Mfg. Co. 4. Titus Products Div.; Philips Industries, Inc. 5. Tuttle & Bailey; Div. of Interpace Corp.

2.2 WALL REGISTERS AND GRILLES:

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard wall registers and grilles where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as indicated, and as required for complete installation.

B. Performance: Provide wall registers and grilles that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device and listed in manufacturer's current data.

C. Wall Compatibility: Provide registers and grilles with border styles that are compatible with adjacent wall systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into wall construction with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of wall construction which will contain each type of wall register and grille.

D. Types: Provide wall registers and grilles of type, capacity, and with accessories and finishes as listed on register and grille schedule. The following requirements shall apply to nomenclature indicated on schedule:

1. Register and Grille Materials:

a. Steel Construction (ST): Manufacturer's standard stamped sheet steel frame and adjustable blades.

b. Aluminum Construction (AL): Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum frame and adjustable blades.

2. Register and Grille Faces:

a. Horizontal Straight Blades (H-S): Horizontal blades, individually adjustable, at manufacturer's standard spacing.

b. Vertically Straight Blades (V-S): Vertical blades, individually adjustable, at manufacturer's standard spacing.

c. Horizontal 45 Degree Fixed Blades (H-4S Degrees): Horizontal blades, fixed at 45 degrees, at manufacturer's standard spacing.

3. Register and Grille Patterns:

a. Single Deflection (S-D): 1-set of blades in face. b. Double Deflection (D-D): 2-sets of blades in face, rear set at 90 degrees to

face set.

4. Register and Grille Dampers:

a. Opposed Blade (O-B): Adjustable opposed blade damper assembly, key



operated from face of register. b. Opposed Blade Fusible Link (OBFL): Opposed blade damper with spring

closing and UL-listed fusible link for 160 degrees F (71 degrees C).

5. Register and Grille Accessories:

a. Extractor (EXTR): Curved blades mounted on adjustable frame to produce air scooping action in duct at register or grille take-off.

b. Plaster Frame (P-F): Perimeter frame designed to act as plaster stop and register or grille anchor.

c. Operating Keys (OP-KY): Tools designed to fit through register or grille face and operate volume control device and/or pattern adjustable.

6. Register and Grille Finishes:

a. Aluminum Enamel (A-E): Air-dried aluminum enamel prime finish. b. White Enamel (W-E): Semi-gloss white enamel prime finish. c. Aluminum Anodize (A-A): Aluminum etched and anodized, covered with

clear lacquer finish.

E. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering registers and grilles which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

F. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide registers and grilles of one of the following:

1. Anemostat Products Div.; Dynamics Corp. of America. 2. Carnes Co.; Div. of Wehr Corp. 3. Titus Products Div.; Philips Industries, Inc.

2.3 LOUVERS:

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard louvers where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as indicated, and as required for complete installation.

B. Performance: Provide louvers that have minimum free area, and maximum pressure drop of each type as listed in manufacturer's current data, complying with louver schedule.

C. Substrate Compatibility: Provide louvers with frame and sill styles that are compatible with adjacent substrate, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into construction openings with accurate fit and adequate support, for weatherproof installation. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of substrate which will contain each type oflouver.

D. Materials: Construct of aluminum extrusions, ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T52. Weld units or use stainless steel fasteners.



E. Louver Screens: On inside face of exterior louvers, provide 1/2" square mesh anodized aluminum wire bird screens mounted in removable extruded aluminum frames.

F. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering louvers which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

G. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide louvers of one of the following:

1. Airline Products Co. 2. Airolite Co. 3. American Warming & Ventilating Inc. 4. Arrow United Industries, Inc. 5. Construction Specialties, Inc. 6. Dowco Corp. 7. Industrial Louvers, Inc. 8. Louvers & Dampers, Inc. 9. Penn Ventilator Co., Inc. 10. Ruskin Mfg. Co. 11. Safe-Air Inc. 12. Snyder (E.G.) Co., Inc. 13. Vent Products Co., Inc.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION:

A. Examine areas and conditions under which air outlets and inlets are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION:

A. General: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in accordance with recognized industry practices to insure that products serve intended function.

B. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork and duct accessories, as necessary to interface installation of air outlets and inlets with other work.

C. Locate ceiling air diffusers, registers, and grilles, as indicated on general construction "Reflected Ceiling Plans". Unless otherwise indicated, locate units in center of acoustical ceiling module.

3.3 SPARE PARTS:

A. Furnish to Owner, with receipt, 3 operating keys for each type of air outlet and inlet that require them.


Section 15932 - Page 8 of 8 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS



.\ i

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANC[

SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

B. Related Sections:

1. General requirements for testing agencies are specified in the Division-l Section Quality Control Services.

2. Other Division-iS Sections specify balancing devices and their installation, and materials and installations of mechanical systems.

3. Individual Division-iS system sections specify leak testing requirements and procedures.

1.2 SUMMARY:

A. This Section specifies the requirements and procedures total mechanical systems testing, adjusting, and balancing. Requirements include measurement and establishment of the fluid quantities of the mechanical systems as required to meet design specifications, and recording and reporting the results.

B. Test, adjust, and balance the following mechanical systems:

1. Supply air systems, all pressure ranges. 2. Return air systems; 3. Exhaust air systems; 4. Verify temperature control system operation.

C. Test systems for proper sound and vibration levels.

D. This Section does not include:

1. testing boilers and pressure vessels for compliance with safety codes; 2. specifications for materials for patching mechanical systems; 3. specifications for materials and installation of adjusting and balancing devices. If

devices must be added to achieve proper adjusting and balancing, refer to the respective system sections for materials and installation requirements.

4. requirements and procedures for piping and ductwork systems leakage tests.

1.3 DEFINITIONS:

A. Systems testing, adjusting, and balancing is the process of checking and adjusting all the building environmental systems to produce the design objectives. It includes:

Shafter-Wasco Irrigation District - Office - #01-267

Section 15990 - Page 2 of7 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

1. the balance of air and water distribution; 2. adjustment of total system to provide design quantities; 3. electrical measurement; 4. verification of performance of all equipment and automatic controls; 5. sound and vibration measurement.

B. Test: To determine quantitative performance of equipment.

C. Adjust: To regulate the specified fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment (e.g., reduce fan speed, throttling).

D. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system (submains, branches, and terminals) according to specified design quantities.

E. Procedure: Standardized approach and execution of sequence of work operations to yield reproducible results.

F. Report forms: Test data sheets arranged for collecting test data in logical order for submission and review. These data should also form the permanent record to be used as the basis for required future testing, adjusting, and balancing.

G. Terminal: The point where the controlled fluid enters or leaves the distribution system. These are supply inlets on water terminals, supply outlets on air terminals, return outlets on water terminals, and exhaust or return inlets on air terminals such as registers, grilles, diffusers, louvers, and hoods.

H. Main: Duct or pipe containing the system's major or entire fluid flow.

1. Submain: Duct or pipe containing part of the systems' capacity and serving two or more branch mains.

J. Branch main: Duct or pipe serving two or more terminals.

K. Branch: Duct or pipe serving a single terminal.

1.4 SUBMITTALS:

A. Agency Data:

1. Submit proof that the proposed testing, adjusting, and balancing agency meets the qualifications specified below.

B. Engineer and Technicians Data:

1. Submit proof that the Test and Balance Engineer assigned to supervise the procedures, and the technicians proposed to perform the procedures meet the qualifications specified below.

C. Procedures and Agenda: Submit a synopsis of the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures and agenda proposed to be used for this project.


TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCI:

D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance and operating data that include how to test, adjust, and balance the building systems. Include this information in maintenance data specified in Division 1 and Section 15010.

E. Sample Forms: Submit sample forms, if other than those standard forms prepared by the AABC are proposed.

F. Sample Forms: Submit sample forms, if other than those standard forms prepared by the NEBB are proposed.

G. Certified Reports: Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing reports bearing the seal and signature of the Test and Balance Engineer. The reports shall be certified proof that the systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced in accordance with the referenced standards; are an accurate representation of how the systems have been installed; are a true representation of how the systems are operating at the completion of the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures; and are an accurate record of all final quantities measured, to establish normal operating values of the systems. Follow the procedures and format specified below:

1.

2.

3.

Draft reports: Upon completion of testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures, prepare draft reports on the approved forms. Draft reports may be hand written, but must be complete, factual, accurate, and legible. Organize and format draft reports in the same manner specified for the final reports. Submit 2 complete sets of draft reports. Only 1 complete set of draft reports will be returned. Final Report: Upon verification and approval of draft reports, prepare final reports, type written, and organized and formatted as specified below. Submit 2 complete sets of final reports. Report Format: Report forms shall be those standard forms prepared by the referenced standard for each respective item and system to be tested, adjusted, and balanced. Bind report forms complete with schematic systems diagrams and other data in reinforced, vinyl, three-ring binders. Provide binding edge labels with the project identification and a title descriptive of the contents. Divide the contents of the binder into the below listed divisions, separated by divider tabs:

a. General Information and Summary b. Air Systems c. Hydronic Systems d. Temperature Control Systems e. Special Systems f. Sound and Vibration Systems

4. Report Contents: Provide the following minimum information, forms and data:

a. General Information and Summary: Inside cover sheet to identify testing, adjusting, and balancing agency, Contractor, Owner, Architect, Engineer, and Project. Include addresses, and contact names and telephone numbers. Also include a certification sheet containing the seal and name address, telephone number, and signature of the Certified Test and Balance Engineer. Include in this division a listing of the instrumentations used for the procedures along



with the proof of calibration. b. The remainder of the report shall contain the appropriate forms containing

as a minimum, the information indicated on the standard report forms prepared by the AABC and NEBB, for each respective item and system. Prepare a schematic diagram for each item of equipment and system to accompany each respective report form.

H. Calibration Reports: Submit proof that all required instrumentation has been calibrated to tolerances specified in the referenced standards, within a period of six months prior to starting the project.


A. Test and Balance Engineer's Qualifications: A Professional Engineer (either on the installer's staff or and independent consultant), registered in the State in which the services are to be performed, and having at least 3-years of successful testing, adjusting, and balancing experience on projects with testing and balancing requirements similar to those required for this project.

B. Agency Qualifications:

1. Employ the services of an independent testing, adjusting, and balancing agency meeting the qualifications specified below, to be the single source of responsibility to test, adjust, and balance the building mechanical systems identified above, to produce the design objectives. Services shall include checking installations for conformity to design, measurement and establishment of the fluid quantities of the mechanical systems as required to meet design specifications, and recording and reporting the results.

2. The independent testing, adjusting, and balancing agency certified by National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEB B) in those testing and balancing disciplines required for this project, and having at least one Professional Engineer registered in the State in which the services are to be performed, certified by NEBB as a Test and Balance Engineer.

C. Agency Qualifications:

D.

1. Employ the services of an independent testing, adjusting, and balancing agency meeting the qualifications specified below, to be the single source of responsibility to test, adjust, and balance the building mechanical systems identified above, to produce the design objectives. Services shall include checking installations for conformity to design, measurement and establishment of the fluid quantities of the mechanical systems as required to meet design specifications, and recording and reporting the results.

2. An independent testing, adjusting, and balancing agency certified by Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) in those testing and balancing disciplines required for this project, and having at least one Professional Engineer registered in the State in which the services are to be performed, certified by AABC as a Test and Balance Engineer.

Codes and Standards:


TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCl

1. NEBB: "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems."

2. AABC: "National Standards For Total System Balance". 3. ASHRAE: ASHRAE Handbook, 1984 Systems Volume, Chapter 37, Testing,

Adjusting, and Balancing.

E. Pre-Balancing Conference: Prior to beginning of the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures, schedule and conduct a conference with the Architect/Engineer and representatives of installers of the mechanical systems. The objective of the conference is final coordination and verification of system operation and readiness for testing, adjusting, and balancing.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS:

A. Systems Operation: Systems shall be fully operational prior to beginning procedures.

1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING:

A. Test, adjust, and balance the air systems before hydronic, steam, and refrigerant systems.

B. Test, adjust and balance air conditioning systems during summer season and heating systems during winter season, including at least a period of operation at outside conditions within 5 deg. F wet bulb temperature of maximum summer design condition, and within 10 deg. F dry bulb temperature of minimum winter design condition. Take final temperature readings during seasonal operation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES FOR AIR SYSTEM BALANCING:

A. Before operating the system, perform these steps:

1. Obtain design drawings and specifications and become thoroughly acquainted with the design intent.

2. Obtain copies of approved shop drawings of all air handling equipment, outlets (supply, return, and exhaust) and temperature control diagrams.

3. Compare design to installed equipment and field installations. 4. Walk the system from the system air handling equipment to terminal units to

determine variations of installation from design. 5. Check filters for cleanliness. 6. Check dampers (both volume and fire) for correct and locked position, and

temperature control for completeness of installation before starting fans. 7. Prepare report test sheets for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet

factors and recommended procedures for testing. Prepare a summation of required outlet volumes to permit a crosscheck with required fan volumes.

8. Determine best locations in main and branch ductwork for most accurate duct



traverses. 9. Place outlet dampers in the full open position. 10. Prepare schematic diagrams of system "as-built" ductwork and piping layouts to

facilitate reporting. 11. Lubricate all motors and bearings. 12. Check fan belt tension. 13. Check fan rotation.

3.2 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEM BALANCING:

A. Before operating the system perform these steps:

1. Open valves to full open position. Close coil bypass valves. 2. Remove and clean all strainers. 3. Examine hydronic systems and determine if water has been treated and cleaned. 4. Check pump rotation. 5. Clean and set automatic fill valves for required system pressure. 6. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that the

system is completely full of water. 7. Check air vents at high points of systems and determine if all are installed and

operating freely (automatic type) or to bleed air completely (manual type). 8. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. 9. Check operation of automatic bypass valves. 10. Check and set operating temperatures of chillers to design requirements. 11. Lubricate all motors and bearings.

3.3 MEASUREMENTS:

A. Provide all required instrumentation to obtain proper measurements, calibrated to the tolerances specified in the referenced standards. Instruments. shall be properly maintained and protected against damage.

B. Provide instruments meeting the specifications of the referenced standards.

C. Use only those instruments which have the maximum field measuring accuracy and are best suited to the function being measured.

D. Apply instrument as recommended by the manufacturer.

E. Use instruments with minimum scale and maximum subdivisions and with scale ranges proper for the value being measured.

F. When averaging values, take a sufficient quantity of readings which will result in a repeatability error of less than 5 percent. When measuring a single point, repeat readings until 2 consecutive identical values are obtained.

G. Take all reading with the eye at the level of the indicated value to prevent parallax.

H. Use pulsation dampeners where necessary to eliminate error involved in estimating average of rapidly fluctuation readings.


( \,

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCl

1. Take measurements in the system where best suited to the task.

3.4 PERFORMING TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING:

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system identified, in accordance with the detailed procedures outlined in the referenced standards.

B. Cut insulation, ductwork, and piping for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures.

C. Patch insulation, ductwork, and housings, using materials identical to those removed.

D. Seal ducts and piping, and test for and repair leaks.

E. Seal insulation to re-establish integrity of the vapor barrier.

F. Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, valve indicators, fan speed control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings. Mark with paint or other suitable, permanent identification materials.

G. Retest, adjust, and balance systems subsequent to significant system modifications, and resubmit test results.

3.5 TESTING FOR SOUND AND VIBRATION:

A. Test and adjust mechanical systems for sound and vibration in accordance with the detailed instructions of the referenced standards.

3.6 RECORD AND REPORT DATA:

A. Record all data obtained during testing, adjusting, and balancing in accordance with, and on the forms recommended by the referenced standards, and as approved on the sample report forms.

B. Prepare report of recommendations for correcting unsatisfactory mechanical performances when system cannot be successfully balanced.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION:

A. Training: 1. Train the Owner's maintenance personnel on troubleshooting procedures and

testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. Review with the Owner's personnel, the information contained in the Operating and Maintenance Data specified in Division 1 and Section 15010.

2. Schedule training with Owner through the Architect/Engineer with at least 7 days prior notice.



SECTION 16010 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

lPART - GENERAL


Section 16010 - Page 1 of 5 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this and the other sections of Division 16.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for electrical installations. The following administrative and procedural requirements are included in this Section to expand the requirements specified in Division 1:

1. Submittals. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. Record documents. 4. Maintenance manuals. 5. Rough-ins. 6. Electrical installations. 7. Cutting and patching.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 1 Section "SUBMITTALS."

B. Increase, by the quantity listed below, the number of electrical related shop drawings, product data, and samples submitted, to allow for required distribution plus two copies of each submittal required, which will be retained by the Electrical Consulting Engineer.

1. Shop Drawings - Initial Submittal: 1 additional blue- or black-line prints. 2. Shop Drawings - Final Submittal: 1 additional blue- or black-line prints. 3. Product Data: 1 additional copy of each item. 4. Samples: 1 addition as set.

C. Additional copies may be required by individual sections of these Specifications.

1.4 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Prepare coordination drawings in accordance with Division 1 Section "PROJECT COORDINATION," to a scale of 1/4"=1'-0" or larger; detailing major elements, components, and systems of electrical equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to) the following:



1. Indicate the proposed locations of major raceway systems, equipment, and materials. Include the following:

a. Clearances for servicing equipment, including space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance.

b. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations. c. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations. d. Equipment connections and support details. e. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases.

2. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning oflarge equipment into the building during construction.

3. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations.

4. Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air outlets and inlets, light fixtures, communications systems components, sprinklers, and other ceiling-mounted devices.

1.5 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Division 1 Section "PROJECT CLOSEOUT." In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, indicate installed conditions for:

1. Major raceway systems, size and location, for both exterior and interior; locations of control devices; distribution and branch electrical circuitry; and fuse and circuit breaker size and arrangements.

2. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building lines.

3. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials installed.

B. Engage the services of a Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer registered in the state in which the project is located as specified in Division 1 Section "FIELD ENGINEERING" to record the locations and invert elevations of underground installations.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 1 Section "PROJECT CLOSEOUT." In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, include the following information for equipment items:

1.

2.

Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating


!

instructions.


3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions.

4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.


A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification.

2PART - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

3PART - EXECUTION

3.1 ROUGH-IN

A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected.

B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 16 for rough-in requirements.

3.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

A. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of electrical systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements:

1. Coordinate electrical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building components.

2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. 3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during

progress of construction, to allow for electrical installations. 4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in

poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. Coordinate connection of electrical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination



requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the Architect.

9. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces.

10. Install electrical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.

11. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section "ACCESS DOORS" and Division 16 Section "BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS."

12. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope.

3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. General: Perform cutting and patching in accordance with Division 1 Section "CUTTING AND PATCHING." In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, the following requirements apply:

1. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of electrical equipment and materials required to:

a. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work b. Remove and replace defective Work c. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract

Documents. d. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing. e. Install equipment and materials in existing structures. f. Upon written instructions from the Architect, uncover and restore Work to

provide for Architect observation of concealed Work

2. Cut, remove, and legally dispose of selected electrical equipment, components, and materials as indicated, including but not limited to removal of electrical items indicated to be removed and items made obsolete by the new Work

3. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed.

4. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.

5. Protection ofInstalled Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect adjacent installations. .

6. Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using new materials matching existing materials and experienced Installers. Installers' qualifications refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and building components being patched.

a. Refer to Division 1 Section "DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS" for definition of experienced "Installer."


. )


7. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials specified for the original installation and experienced Installers. Installers' qualifications refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and building components being patched.

b. Refer to Division 1 Section "DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS" for definition of experienced "Installer."



Section 16050 - Page 1 of 11 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

1PART - GENERAL



B. Requirements specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Requirements" apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes limited scope general construction materials and methods for application with electrical installations as follows:

1. Selective demolition including:

a. Nondestructive removal of materials and equipment for reuse or salvage as indicated.

b. Dismantling electrical materials and equipment made obsolete by these installations.

2. Excavation for underground utilities and services, including underground raceways, vaults, and equipment.

3. Miscellaneous metals for support of electrical materials and equipment. 4. Wood grounds, nailers, blocking, fasteners, and anchorage for support of electrical

materials and equipment. 5. Joint sealers for sealing around electrical materials and equipment; and for sealing

penetrations in fire and smoke barriers, floors, and foundation walls. 6. Access panels and doors in walls, ceilings, and floors for access to electrical

materials and equipment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. The following definitions apply to excavation operations:

1. Additional Excavation: Where excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, if unsuitable bearing materials are encountered, continue excavation until suitable bearing materials are reached. The Contract Sum may be adjusted by an appropriate Contract Modification.

2. Subbase: as used in this Section refers to the compacted soil layer used in pavement systems between the subgrade and the pavement base course material.

3. Subgrade: as used in this Section refers to the compacted soil immediately below the slab or pavement system.

4. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction from the Architect.



1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data for the following products:

1. Access panels and doors. 2. Joint sealers.

C. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and installation for metal fabrications, and wood supports and anchorage for electrical materials and equipment.

D. Coordination drawings for access panel and door locations in accordance with Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Requirements."

E. Samples of joint sealer, consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available for each product.

F. Welder certificates, signed by Contractor, certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under "Quality Assurance" article of this Section.

G. Schedules indicating proposed methods and sequence of operations for selective demolition prior to commencement of Work. Include coordination for shut-off of electrical service, and details for dust and noise control.

1. Coordinate sequencing with construction phasing and Owner occupancy specified in Division 1 Section "Summary of Work."


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer for the installation and application joint sealers, access panels, and doors.

B. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.

C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where a fire-resistance classification is indicated, provide access door assembly with panel door, frame, hinge, and latch from manufacturer listed in the UL "Building Materials Directory" for rating shown.

1. Provide UL Label on each fire-rated access door.




A. Deliver jaint sealer materials in ariginal unapened cantainers ar bundles with labels infarming abaut manufacturer, product name and designatian, calar, expiratian periad far use, pat life, curing time, and mixing instructians far multi-camp anent materials.

B. Stare and handle jaint sealer materials in campliance with the manufacturers' recammendatians to. prevent their deteriaratian and damage.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Canditians Affecting Selective Demalitian: The fallawing praject canditians apply:

1. Pratect adjacent materials indicated to. remain. Install and maintain dust and naise barriers to. keep dirt, dust, and naise fram being transmitted to. adjacent areas. Remave pratectian and barriers after demalitian aperatians are camplete.

2. Lacate, identify, and pratect electrical services passing thraugh demalitian area and serving ather areas autside the demalitian limits. Maintain services to. areas autside demalitian limits. When services must be interrupted, install temparary services far affected areas.

B. Canditians Affecting Excavatians: The fallawing praject canditians apply:

1. Maintain and pratect existing building services which transit the area affected by selective demalitian.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Pratect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and ather facilities fram damage caused by settlement, lateral mavement, undermining, washaut, and ather hazards created by excavatian aperatians. Site Infarmatian: Subsurface canditians were investigated during the design af the Praject. Reparts afthese investigatians are available far infarmatian anly; data in the rep arts are nat intended as representatians ar warranties af accuracy ar cantinuity af canditians. The Owner will nat be respansible far interpretatians ar canclusians drawn fram this infarmatian. Existing Utilities: Lacate existing undergraund utilities in excavatian areas. If utilities are indicated to. remain, suppart and pratect services during excavatian aperatians. Remave existing undergraund utilities indicated to. be remaved.

a. Uncharted ar Incarrectly Charted Utilities: Cantact utility awner immediately far instructians.

b. Pravide temparary utility services to. affected areas. Pravide minimum af 48-haur natice to. Architect priar to. utility interruptian.

6. Use af explasives is nat permitted.

C. Enviranmental Canditians: Apply jaint sealers under temperature and humidity canditians within the limits permitted by the jaint sealer manufacturer. Do. no. apply jaint sealers to. wet substrates.

1.8 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING

Shafter-Wasco. Irrigatio.n District - Office -#01-267


A. Coordinate the shut-off and disconnection of electrical service with the Owner and the utility company.

B. Notify the Architect at least 5 days prior to commencing demolition operations.

C. Perform demolition in phases as indicated.

2PART - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, crushed slag, or natural or crushed sand.

B. Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve, and not more than 5 percent passing a No.4 sieve.

C. Backfill and Fill Materials: Materials complying with ASTM D2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SM, SW, and SP; free of clay, rock, or gravel larger than 2 inches in any dimension; debris; waste; frozen materials; and vegetable and other deleterious matter.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS METALS

A. Steel plates, shapes, bars, and bar grating: ASTM A 36.

B. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500.

C. Hot-Rolled Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501.

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, welded.

E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout, recommended for interior and exterior applications.

F. Fasteners: Zinc-coated, type, grade, and class as required.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. Framing Materials: Standard Grade, light-framing-size lumber of any species. Number 3 Common or Standard Grade boards complying with WCLIB or AWPA rules, or Number 3 boards complying with SPIB rules. Lumber shall be preservative treated in accordance with AWPB LP-2, and kiln dried to a moisture content of not more than 19 percent.

B. Construction Panels: Plywood panels; APA C-D PLUGGED INT, with exterior glue; thickness as indicated, or ifnot indicated, not less that 15/32 inches.


2.4 JOINT SEALERS


A. General: Joint sealers, joint fillers, and other related materials compatible with each other and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application.

B. Colors: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.

C. Elastomeric Joint Sealers: Provide the following types:

1. One-part, nonacid-curing, silicone sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for uses in non-traffic areas for masonry, glass, aluminum, and other substrates recommended by the sealant manufacturer.

2. One-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for uses in non-traffic areas for glass, aluminum, and nonporous joint substrates; formulated with fungicide; intended for sealing interior joints with nonporous substrates; and subject to in-service exposure to conditions of high humidity and temperature extremes.

3. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

4. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. One-Part, Nonacid-Curing, Silicone Sealant:

1) "Chern-Calk N-Cure 2000," Bostic Construction Products Div. 2) "Dow Corning 790," Dow Corning Corp. 3) "Silglaze N SCS 2501," General Electric Co. 4) "SilprufSCS 2000," General Electric Co. 5) "864," Pecora Corp. 6) "Rhodorsil5C," Rhone-Poulenc, Inc. 7) "Spectrum 1," Tremco, Inc. 8) "Spectrum 2,"·Tremco, Inc.

"Dow Corning 795," Dow Corning Corp. 10) "Rhodorsil6B," Rhone-Poulenc, Inc. 11) "Rhodorsil 70," Rhone-Poulenc, Inc. 12) "Omniseal," Sonneborn Building Products Div. 13) "Chern-Calk 100," Bostik Construction Products Div. 14) "Gesil N SCS 2600," General Electric Co.

b. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant, Silicone Sealant:

1) , "Dow Corning 786," Dow Corning Corp. 2) "SCS 1702 Sanitary," General Electric Co. 3) "863 #345 White," Pecora Corp. 4) "Rhodorsil6B White," Rhone-Poulenc, Inc. 5) "Proglaze White," Tremco Corp. 6) "OmniPlus," Sonneborn Building Products Div.

D. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealants: One-part, nonsag, mildew-resistant, paintable complying with ASTM C 834 recommended for exposed applications on interior and protected exterior



locations involving joint movement of not more than plus or minus 5 percent.



a. "Chern-Calk 600," Bostik Construction Products Div. b. "AC-20," Pecora Corp. c. Sonolac," Sonneborn Building Products Div. {9997,jTEXT, 152}

List_element ["Tremco Acrylic Latex 834," Tremco, Inc.

E. Fire-Resistant Joint Sealers: Two-part, foamed-in-place, silicone sealant formulated for use in through-penetration fire-stopping around cables, conduit, pipes, and duct penetrations through fire- rated walls and floors. Sealants and accessories shall have fire- resistance ratings indicated, as established by testing identical assemblies in accordance with ASTM E 814, by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.



a. "Dow Corning Fire Stop Foam," Dow Corning Corp. b. "Pensil851," General Electric Co.

2.5 ACCESS DOORS

A. Steel Access Doors and Frames: Factory-fabricated and assembled units, complete with attachment devices and fasteners ready for installation. Joints and seams shall be continuously welded steel, with welds ground smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.

B. Frames: 16-gage steel, with a 1-inch-wide exposed perimeter flange for units installed in unit masonry, pre-cast, or cast-in-place concrete, ceramic tile, or wood paneling.

1. For installation in masonry, concrete, ceramic tile, or wood paneling: 1 inch-wideexposed perimeter flange and adjustable metal masonry anchors.

2. For gypsum wallboard or plaster: perforated flanges with wallboard bead. 3. For full-bed plaster applications: galvanized expanded metal lath and exposed

casing bead, welded to perimeter of frame.

C. Flush Panel Doors: 14-gage sheet steel, with conceaied spring hinges or concealed continuous piano hinge set to open 175 degrees; factory-applied prime paint.

1. Fire-Rated Units: Insulated flush panel doors, with continuous piano hinge and self-closing mechanism.

D. Locking Devices: Flush, screwdriver-operated cam locks.

E. Locking Devices: Where indicated, provide 5-pin or 5-disc type cylinder locks,


. "-'\

. J

individually keyed; provide 2 keys.


F. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

G. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Bar-Co., Inc. 2. J.L. Industries. 3. Karp Associates, Inc. 4. Milcor Div. Inryco, Inc. 5. Nystrom, Inc.

3PART - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting installation and application of joint sealers and access panels. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected .

3.2 PREPARATION FOR JOINT SEALERS

A. Surface Cleaning for Joint Sealers: Clean surfaces of joints immediately before applying joint sealers to comply with recommendations of joint sealer manufacturer.

B. Apply joint sealer primer to substrates as recommended by joint sealer manufacturer. Protect adjacent areas from spillage and migration of primers, using masking tape. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

A. General: Demolish, remove, demount, and disconnect abandoned electrical materials and equipment indicated to be removed and not indicated to be salvaged or saved.

B. Materials and Equipment To Be Salvaged: Remove, demount, and disconnect existing electrical materials and equipment indicated to be removed and salvaged, and deliver materials and equipment to the location designated for storage.

C. Disposal and Cleanup: Remove from the site and legally dispose of demolished materials and equipment not indicated to be salvaged.

D. Electrical Materials and Equipment: Demolish, remove, demount, and disconnect the following items: 1. Inactive and obsolete raceway systems, controls, and fixtures.



a. Raceways embedded in floors, walls, and ceilings may remain if such materials do not interfere with new installations. Remove materials above accessible ceilings.

2. Perform cutting and patching required for demolition in accordance with Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."

3.4 EXCAVATION

A. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and ordinances. Shore and brace as required for stability of excavation.

B. Shoring and Bracing: Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with local codes and authorities. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period excavations will be open.

1. Remove shoring and bracing when no longer required. Where sheeting is allowed to remain, cut top of sheeting at an elevation of 30 inches below finished grade elevation.

C. Install sediment and erosion control measures in accordance with local codes and ordinances.

D. Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area.

1. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of bearing materials. Provide and maintain dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations.

2. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits to convey surface water to collecting or run-off areas. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches.

E. Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed, until required for backfill or fill. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles for proper drainage.

1. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip-line of trees indicated to remain.

2. Remove and legally dispose of excess excavated materials and materials not acceptable for use as backfill or fill.

F. Excavation for Underground Vaults and Electrical Structures: Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot; plus a sufficient distance to permit placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation of services, other construction, and for inspection.

1. Excavate, by hand, areas within drip-line of large trees. Protect the root system from damage and dry-out. Maintain moist conditions for root system and cover


\ \


exposed roots with burlap. Paint root cuts of 1 inch in diameter and larger with emulsified asphalt tree paint.

2. Take care not to disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete reinforcement is placed.

G. Trenching: Excavate trenches for electrical installations as follows:

1. Excavate trenches to the uniform width, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room and a minimum of 6 to 9 inches clearance on both sides of raceways and equipment.

2. Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required. 3. Limit the length of open trench to that in which installations can be made and the

trench backfilled within the same day. 4. Where rock is encountered, carry excavation below required elevation and backfill

with a layer of crushed stone or gravel prior to installation of raceways and equipment. Provide a minimum of 6 inches of stone or gravel cushion between rock bearing surface and electrical installations.

H. Cold Weather Protection: Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less than 35 deg F (1 deg 2 C).

I. Backfilling and Filling: Place soil materials in layers to required sub grade elevations for each area classification listed below, using materials specified in Part 2 of this Section.

1. Under walks and pavements, use a combination of subbase materials and excavated or borrowed materials.

2. Under building slabs, use drainage fill materials. 3. Under piping and equipment, use subbase materials where required over rock

bearing surface and for correction of unauthorized excavation .. 4. For raceways less than 30 inches below surface of roadways, provide 4-inch-thick

concrete base slab support. After installation of raceways, provide a 4-inch thick concrete encasement (sides and top) prior to backfilling and placement of roadway subbase.

5. Other areas, use excavated or borrowed materials.

J. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following:

1. Inspection, testing, approval, and locations of underground utilities have been recorded.

2. Removal of concrete formwork. 3. Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids. 4. Removal of trash and debris.

K. Placement and Compaction: Place backfill and fill materials in layers of not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

L. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum



moisture content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each area classification specified below. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.

M. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, piping, and equipment to required elevations. Prevent displacement of raceways and equipment by carrying material uniformly around them to approximately same elevation in each lift.

N. Compaction: Control soil compaction during construction, providing minimum percentage of density specified for each area classification indicated below.

1. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum density for soils which exhibit a well-defined moisture-density relationship (cohesive soils), determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557 and not less than the following percentages of relative density, determined in accordance with ASTM D 2049, for soils which will not exhibit a well-defined moisture-density relationship ( cohesionless soils).

a.

b.

c.

Areas Under Structures, Building Slabs and Steps, Pavements: Compact top 12 inches of sub grade and each layer of backfill or fill material to 90 percent maximum density for cohesive material, or 95 percent relative density for cohesionless material. Areas Under Walkways: Compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material to 90 percent maximum density for cohesive material, or 95 percent relative density for cohesionless material. Other Areas: Compact top 6 inches of sub grade and each layer of backfill or fill material to 85 percent maximum density for cohesive soils, and 90 percent relative density for cohesionless soils.

2. Moisture Control: Where sub grade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water. Apply water in minimum quantity necessary to achieve required moisture content and to prevent water appearing on surface during, or subsequent to, compaction operations.

O. Subsidence: Where subsidence occurs at electrical installation excavations during the period 12 months after Substantial Completion, remove surface treatment (i.e., pavement, lawn, or other finish), add backfill material, compact to specified conditions, and replace surface treatment. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of surface or finish to match adjacent areas.

3.5 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS "Structural Welding Code."

3.6 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE


\ I


A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorage accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.

C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.

3.7 APPLICATION OF JOINT SEALERS

A. General: Comply with joint sealer manufacturers' printed application instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.

1. Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 962 for use of elastomeric joint sealants.

2. Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 790 for use of acrylic- emulsion joint sealants.

B. Tooling: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time shinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.

C. Installation of Fire-Stopping Sealant: Install sealant, including forming, packing, and other accessory materials, to fill openings around electrical services penetrating floors and walls, to provide fire-stops with fire-resistance ratings indicated for floor or wall assembly in which penetration occurs. Comply with installation requirements established by testing and inspecting agency.

3.8 INSTALLATION OF ACCESS DOORS

A. Set frames accurately in position and securely attached to supports, with face panels plumb and level in relation to adjacent finish surfaces.

B. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation.



( " ~, ~

SECTION 16100 - RACEWAYS, BOXES, AND CABINETS

1PART - GENERAL


Section 16100 - Page 1 of 10 RACEWAYS, BOXES, AND CABINETS


1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.

B. Raceways include the following:

1. Rigid metal conduit. 2. Intermediate metal conduit. 3. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) externally coated rigid steel conduit. 4. PVC externally coated intermediate metal conduit. 5. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT). 6. Flexible metal conduit. 7. Liquidtight flexible conduit. 8. Rigid nonmetallic conduit. 9. Electrical nonmetallic tubing (ENT). 10. Wireway. 11. Surface raceways.

C. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets include the following:

1. Device boxes. 2. Floor boxes. 3. Outlet boxes. 4. Pull and junction boxes. 5. Cabinets and hinged cover enclosures.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sectjons.

B. Product data for surface raceway, wireway and fittings, floor boxes, hinged cover enclosures, and cabinets.

C. Shop drawings for nonstandard boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. Include layout drawings showing components and wiring.




2.

A. Comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code" for components and installation.

B. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.

1. The Terms "Listed and Labeled": As defined in the "National Electrical Code," Article 100. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

C. Comply with NECA "Standard ofInstallation."

D. Coordinate layout and installation of raceway and boxes with other construction elements to ensure adequate headroom, working clearance, and access.

2PART - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering Products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Products by of one of the following:

1. Metal Conduit and Tubing:

a. Monogram Co., AFC; b. Alflex Corp. c. Allied Tube and Conduit, Grinnell Co. d. Anamet, Inc., Anaconda Metal Hose. e. Anixter Brothers, Inc. f. Carol Cable Co., Inc. g. Cole-Flex Corp. h. Flexcon, Inc., Coleman Cable Systems, Inc. i. Spiraduct, Inc. j. Triangle PWC, Inc. k. Wheatland Tube Co.

2. Nonmetallic Tubing and Conduit:

a. Anamet, Inc., Anaconda Metal Hose. b. Arnco Corp. c. Breeze-Illinois, Inc. d. Can-Tex Industries, Harsco Corp. e. Carlon.


f. Certainteed Corp, Pipe & Plastics Group. g. Cole-Flex Corp. h. Condux International, Electrical Products. i. Electri-Flex Co. j. George-Ingraham Corp. k Hubbell, Inc., Raco, Inc. 1. R&G Sloan Manufacturing Co., Inc. m. Spiraduct, Inc. n. Thomas & Betts Corp.

3. Conduit Bodies and Fittings:

a. Scott Fetzer Company, Adalet-PLM.


b. American Electric, Construction Materials Group. c. Emerson Electric Co., Appleton Electric Co. d. Carlon. e. Hubbell, Inc., Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. f. General Signal, O-ZjGedney Unit. g. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co.

4. Wireway:

a. Hoffman Engineering Co. b. KeystonejRees, Inc. c. Square D Co.

5. Surface Metal Raceway:

a. Airey-Thompson Co., Inc., A-T Power Systems. b. American Electric, Construction Materials Group. c. Butler Manufacturing Co., Walker Division. d. The Wiremold Co., Electrical Sales Division.

6. Surface Nonmetallic Raceway:

a. Anixter Brothers, Inc. b. Butler Manufacturing Co., Walker Division. c. Hubbell, Inc., Wiring Device Division. d. JBC Enterprises, Inc., Enduro Fiberglass Systems. e. Panduit Corp. f. United Telecom, Premier Telecom Products, Inc. g. Thermotools Co. h. The Wire mold Co., Electrical Sales Division.

7. Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets:

a. Scott Fetzer Company, Adalet-PLM. b. Butler Manufacturing Co., Walker Division. c. Cooper Industries, Midwest Electric.


Section 16100 - Page 4 of10 RACEWAYS, BOXES, AND CABINETS

d. Electric Panelboard Co., Inc. e. Erickson Electrical Equipment Co. f. American Electric, FL Industries. g. Hoffman Engineering Co., Federal-Hoffman, Inc. h. Hubbell Inc., Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. L General Signal, O-Z/Gedney. j. Parker Electrical Manufacturing Co. k. Raco, Inc., Hubbell Inc. 1. Robroy Industries, Inc., Electrical Division. m. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co. n. Square D Co. o. Thomas & Betts Corp. p. Woodhead Industries, Inc., Daniel Woodhead Co.

2.2 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

B. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: ANSI C80.S.

C. Intermediate Metal Conduit: ANSI C80.6.

D. Plastic-Coated Steel Conduit and Fittings: NEMA RN 1.

E. Plastic-Coated Intermediate Metal Conduit and Fittings: NEMA RN 1.

F. Electrical Metallic Tubing and Fittings: ANSI C80.3 with set-screw or compression-type fittings.

G. Flexible Metal Conduit: Aluminum.

H. Flexible Metal Conduit: Zinc-coated steel.

I. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.

]. Fittings: NEMA FB 1, compatible with conduit/tubing materials.

2.3 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing CENT): NEMA TC 13 ..

B. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit CRNC): NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 or 80 PVc.

C. PVC Conduit and Tubing Fittings: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or conduit/tubing type and material.

2.4 WIRE WAYS

A. Material: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated.


Section 16100 - Page 5 of10 RACEWAYS, BOXES, AND CABINETS

B. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireway as required for complete system.

C. Select features where not otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to comply with NEC.

D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.5 SURFACE RACEWAY

A. Types, sizes, and channels as indicated and required for each application, with fittings that match and mate with raceway.

B. Surface Metal Raceway: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Finish with manufacturer's standard prime coating suitable for painting.

C. Surface Nonmetallic Raceway: 2-piece construction, manufactured of rigid PVC compound with matte texture and manufacturer's standard color.

2.6 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES

A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

B. Cast Metal Boxes: NEMA FB 1, type FD, cast feralloy box with gasketed cover.

C. Nonmetallic Boxes: NEMA OS 2.

2.7 FLOOR BOXES

A. Floor Box: Cast metal, fully adjustable, rectangular.

2.8 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. Small Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

B. Cast Metal Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.

2.9 CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES

A. Hinged Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, steel enclosure with continuous hinge cover and flush latch. Finish inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

B. Cabinets: NEMA 250, type 1, galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match



panelboards. Include metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage, and include accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

3PART - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to receive raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the raceway system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 WIRING METHODS

A. Outdoors: Use the following wiring methods:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

6.

Exposed: Rigid or intermediate metal conduit. Concealed: Rigid or intermediate metal conduit. Underground, Single Run: Rigid nonmetallic conduit. Underground, Grouped: Rigid nonmetallic conduit. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (including transformers and hydraulic, pneumatic, or electric solenoid or motor-driven equipment): Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA Type 3R or Type 4.

B. Indoors: Use the following wiring methods:

1. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (including transformers and hydraulic, pneumatic, or electric solenoid or motor-driven equipment): Flexible metal conduit, except in wet or damp locations use liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

2. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit. 3. Exposed: Electrical metallic tubing or rigid nonmetallic conduit. 4. Concealed: Electrical metallic tubing, electrical nonmetallic tubing, or rigid

nonmetallic conduit. 5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA Type 1, except in damp or wet locations use NEMA

Type 4, stainless steel. 6. Armored Cable, Type AC: where permitted by Code. 7. Armored Cable, Type AC: for wiring in gypsum board partitions and for

connections from raceway outlet boxes to lighting fixtures. 8. Metal Clad Cable, Type MC: where indicated and elsewhere, where permitted by

Code.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Conceal conduit and EMT, unless otherwise indicated, within finished walls, ceilings, and


floors.


C. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

D. Install raceways level and square and at proper elevations. Provide adequate headroom.

E. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

F. Support raceway as specified in Division 16 Section "Supporting Devices."

G. Use temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceway.

H. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved portion of bends is not visible above the finished slab.

I. Make bends and offsets so the inside diameter is not reduced. Unless otherwise indicated, keep the legs of a bend in the same plane and the straight legs of offsets parallel.

J. Use raceway fittings compatible with raceway and suitable for use and location. For intermediate steel conduit, use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, except as otherwise indicated.

K. Run concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance considering the type of building construction and obstructions, except as otherwise indicated.

L. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: Install in middle third of the slab thickness where practical, and leave at least 1 inch (25 mm) concrete cover.

1. Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete placement.

2. Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in the concrete. 3. Run conduit larger than l-inch trade size parallel to or at right angles to main

reinforcement. When at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support.

4. Transition nonmetallic tubing to Schedule 80 nonmetallic conduit, rigid steel conduit, or IMC before rising above floor.

M. Install exposed raceways parallel to or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members, and follow the surface contours as much as practical.

1. Run parallel or banked raceways together, on common supports where practical. 2. Make bends in parallel or banked runs from same center line to make bends

parallel. Use factory elbows only where they can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways.

N. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for the purpose and make joints tight.



1. Make raceway terminations tight. Use bonding bushings or wedges at connections subject to vibration. Use bonding jumpers where joints cannot be made tight.

2. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors.

O. Tighten set screws of threadless fittings with suitable tool.

P. Terminations: Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align the raceway to enter squarely, and install the locknuts with dished part against the box. Where terminations cannot be made secure with one locknut, use two locknuts, one inside and one outside the box.

Q. Where terminating in threaded hubs, screw the raceway or fitting tight into the hub so the end bears against the wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align the raceway so the coupling is square to the box, and tighten the chase nipple so no threads are exposed.

R. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 AWG zinc-coated steel or monofilament plastic line having not less than 200-lb (90 kg) tensile strength. Leave not less than 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of the pull wire.

S. Telephone and Signal System Raceways 2-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: In addition to the above requirements, install in maximum lengths of 150 feet (45 m) and with a maximum of two 90-deg bends or equivalent. Install pull or junction boxes where necessary to comply with these requirements.

T. Install raceway sealing fittings according to the manufacturer's written instructions. Locate fittings at suitable, approved, accessible locations and fill them with UL-listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points and elsewhere as indicated:

1. Where conduits enter or leave hazardous locations. 2. Where conduits pass from warm locations to cold locations, such as the

boundaries of refrigerated spaces and air-conditioned spaces. 3. Where otherwise required by the NEe.

U. Stub-Up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs, and set flush with the finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; flexible metal conduit may be used 6 inches (150 mm) above the floor. Where equipment connections are not made under this Contract, install screwdriver-operated threaded flush plugs flush with floor.

v. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 6 feet (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for all motors. Use liquidtight flexible conduit in wet or damp locations. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections.


( "

)

Section 16100 - Page 9 ofl0 RACEWAYS, BOXES, AND CABINETS

W. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceway is installed for such circuits and it passes through concrete, install in a nonmetallic sleeve.

X. Do not install aluminum conduit embedded in or in contact with concrete.

Y. PVC Externally Coated Rigid Steel Conduit: Use only fittings approved for use with that material. Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduit.

Z. Surface Metal Raceway: Install a separate green ground conductor in raceway from the junction box supplying the raceway to receptacle or fixture ground terminals.

1. Select each surface metal raceway outlet box to which a lighting fixture is attached to be of sufficient diameter to provide a seat for the fixture canopy.

2. Where a surface metal raceway is used to supply a fluorescent lighting fixture having central stem suspension with a backplate and a canopy (with or without extension ring), the backplate and canopy will serve as the outlet box and no separate outlet box need be provided.

3. Provide surface metal raceway outlet box, in addition to the backplate and canopy, at the feed-in location of each fluorescent lighting fixture having end stem suspension.

4. Where a surface metal raceway extension is made from an existing outlet box on which a lighting fixture is installed (provide a backplate slightly smaller than the fixture canopy), no additional surface mounted outlet box need be installed.

AA. Set floor boxes level and adjust to floor surface.

BB. Install hinged cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each corner.

Cc. Provide grounding connections for raceway, boxes, and components as indicated and instructed by manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to equipment manufacturer's published torque-tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals according to tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, to ensure that coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion ..

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touch-up coating recommended by the manufacturer.

3.5 CLEANING



A. Upon completion of installation of system, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish, including chips, scratches, and abrasions.



Section 16120 - Page 1 of 5 WIRES AND CABLES

SECTION 16120 - WIRES AND CABLES

lPART - GENERAL




1. Basic Electrical Requirements.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes wires, cables, and connectors for power, lighting, signal, control and related systems rated 600 volts and less.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data for electrical wires, cables and connectors.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following code:

B. NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code."

1. Conform to applicable codes and regulations regarding toxicity of combustion products of insulating materials.

C. UL Compliance: Provide components which are listed and labeled by UL under the following standards.

1. 2. 3.

4. 5.

UL Std. 4 UL Std. 83 UL Std. 486A

UL Std. 486B UL Std. 854.

Armored Cable. Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables. Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper

Conductors. Wire Connectors for Use with Aluminum Conductors. Service Entrance Cable.

D. NEMAjICEA Compliance: Provide components which comply with the following standards:

1.

2.

WC-5 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy.

WC-7 Cross Linked Thermosetting Polyethylene-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy.



3. WC-8 Ethylene-Propylene-Rubber-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy.

E. IEEE Compliance: Provide components which comply with the following standard.

1. Std. 82 Test procedures for Impulse Voltage Tests on Insulated Conductors.

2PART - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:


1. Wire and Cable:

a. American Insulated Wire Corp. b. Brintec Corp. c. Carol Cable Co. Inc. d. Senator Wire and Cable Co. e. Southwire Company.

2. Connectors for Wires and Cable Conductors:

a. AMP b. 3M Company c. O-Z/Gedney Co. d. Square D Company.

2.2 WIRES AND CABLES

A. General: Provide wire and cable suitable for the temperature, conditions and location where installed.

B. Conductors: Provide solid conductors for power and lighting circuits no. 10 AWG and smaller. Provide stranded conductors for sizes no. 8 AWG and larger.

C. Conductor Material: copper for all wires and cables.

D. Conductor Material: use the following material for sizes indicated.

1. 2.

No.6 AWG and Smaller: copper No.4 AWG and Larger: copper, copper-clad aluminum, or aluminum may be used


~ I

3.


at the Contractor's option, except where another specific material is indicated.

E. Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper. If aluminum or copper clad aluminum option is selected, modify conductor sizes as required to provide equivalent ampacity to indicated copper conductors. (A minus tolerance of 2 percent is permissible.) Fully adapt and adjust the electrical system to the use of aluminum in lieu of copper. This includes, but is not limited to, the following actions:

1. Where connecting to equipment whose manufacturer requires copper conductors connection, provide copper conductors and all necessary splices, splice boxes and other devices required to satisfy manufacturer requirements. Do not otherwise intermix copper and aluminum conductors.

2. Increase conduit size and increase sizes of pull boxes, and junction boxes, and gutter space as required to accommodate larger aluminum conductors. Make structural, mechanical and other construction adjustments necessitated by these changes.

3. Assure the pulling tension rating of the aluminum conductors is adequate for wiring runs indicated.

4. Assure that equipment at which aluminum conductors terminate is UL listed and manufacturer approved for use with aluminum and so labeled.

5. Submit to the Architect a record of actions taken in accordance with the above including marked-up project drawings, copies of manufacturer literature and communications and written conductor re-sizing calculations.

6. Do not reduce raceway or enclosure sizes as part of the above adjustments.

F. Insulation: Provide THHN/THWN insulation for all conductors size 500MCM and larger, and no. 8 AWG and smaller. For all other sizes provide THW, THHN/THWN or XHHW insulation as appropriate for the locations where installed.

G. Color Coding for phase identification in accordance with Table 1 in Part 3 below.

H. Jackets: Factory-applied nylon or PVC external jacketed wires and cables for pulls in raceways over 100-feet in length, for pulls in raceways with more than three equivalent 90 deg. bends, for pulls in conduits underground or under slabs on grade, and where indicated.

I. Cables: Provide the following type(s) of cables in NEC approved locations and applications where indicated. Provide cable UL listed for particular application:

1. 2.

4. 5. 6. 7.

Armored Cable: Types AC and ACL. Metal-Clad Cable: Type MC: Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cable: Type NM and NMC. Above ground Service-Entrance Cable: Type SE. Underground Service-Entrance Cable: Type USE. Underground Feeder and Branch-Circuit Cable: Type UFo Portable Cord: Type S.

2.3 CONNECTORS FOR CONDUCTORS



A. Provide UL-listed factory-fabricated, solderless metal connectors of sizes, ampacity ratings, materials, types and classes for applications and for services indicated. Use connectors with temperature ratings equal to or greater than those of the wires upon which used.

3PART - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF WIRES AND CABLES

A. General: Install electrical cables, wires, and connectors in compliance with NEe.

B. Coordinate cable installation with other Work

e. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same raceway. Use UL listed pulling compound or lubricant, where necessary.

D. Use pulling means including, fish tape, cable, rope, and basket weave wire/cable grips which will not damage cables or raceways. Do not use rope hitches for pulling attachment to wire or cable.

E. Conceal all cable in finished spaces.

F. Install exposed cable parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural members, and follow surface contours, where possible.

G. Keep conductor splices to minimum.

H. Install splice and tap connectors which possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation rating than conductors being spliced.

I. Use splice and tap connectors which are compatible with conductor material.

]. Provide adequate length of conductors within electrical enclosures and train the conductors to terminal points with no excess. Bundle multiple conductors, with conductors larger than no 10 AWG cabled in individual circuits. Make terminations so there is no bare conductor at the terminal.

K. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.


A. Prior to energizing, check installed wires and cables with megohm meter to determine insulation resistance levels to assure requirements are fulfilled.

B. Prior to energizing, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for short-circuits.



C. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuits and demonstrate proper functioning. Correct malfunctioning units, and retest to demonstrate compliance.

D. TABLE 1: Color Coding for Phase Identification:

1. Color code secondary service, feeder, and branch circuit conductors with factory applied color as follows: 208y/120Volts Phase 480yl277 Volts

Black Red Blue White Green


A B C Neutral White Ground

Yellow Brown Orange

Green


Section 16143 - Page 1 of7 WIRING DEVICES

SECTION 16143 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1

A.

B.

RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

Requirements of the following Division 16 Sections apply to this section:

1. Basic Electrical Requirements.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

2. Receptacles 3. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles 4. Plugs 5. Plug Connectors 6. Snap Switches 7. Incandescent Lamp Dimmer-Switches 8. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer-Switches 9. Wall Plates 10. Floor Service Outlets 11. Poke-Through Assemblies 12. Telephone/Power Poles

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data for each type of product specified.

B. Samples of those products indicated for sample submission in Architect's comments on product data submittal. Include color and finish samples of device plates and other items per Architect's request.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following codes.

B. NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code".

1. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide wiring devices which are listed and labeled by UL and comply with applicable UL and NEMA standards.

1.5 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING



A. Schedule installation of finish plates after the surface upon which they are installed has received final finish.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:


1. Bryant Electric Co. Z. Challenger-Circle F 3. Crouse-Hinds Co. 4. Eagle Electric Mfg. Co. 5. General Electric Co. 6. Hubbell Inc. 7. Pass and Seymour Inc. 8. Slater Electric Co. 9. Square D Co. 10. Steel City; Midland-Ross Corp. 11. Walker Division-Butler Mfg. Co.

2.2 WIRING DEVICES,TELEPHONE/DATA OUTLETS

Provide wiring devices, in types, characteristics, grades, colors, and electrical ratings which are UL listed complying w / NEMA WDl and other applicable UL and NEMA standards.

A. Receptacles shall be UL 498 & NEMA WD 6, straight blade, two pole, side wired three-wire grounding type- Crouse-Hinds, Hubbell, Square D, Walker or approved equal, except as indicated below:

OUTLETCURRENT VOLTAGE TYPE RATING RATING

Duplex 20A Duplex GFI Single Single Single, Locking Single, Locking _ Single, Locking _

125V

250V 125V 250V 250V

NEMA UL GRADE

MANU

5-20R Heavy Duty HDwj GFI Heavy Duty

Pin & Sleeve As Req'd As Req'd

6-20R L5-20R L6-20R L6-30R NA 498-General

1010-Classified

Hubbell 5362 or equal HubbellGF5362 or equal Hubbell 5361 or equal Hubbell 5461 or equal Hubbell 2310 or equal Hubbell 2320 or equal Hubbell 2620 orequ~

Hubbell or equal

Notes: GFI receptacles shall protect downstream recept. On same circuit Provide locking recept. w / black nylon face, UNO Verify features for Pin & Sleeve type outlet Std. white color devices w/ gray for P.C's UNO



B. Switches shall be UL 20 and NEMA WD1, quiet toggle-type AC switch. Ratings & types, except as otherwise indicated: TYPE LOAD VOLTAGE UL MANU

RATING RATING GRADE Single pole 20A 120/277 V Heavy Duty Hubbell HBL 1221 or equal Double pole Hubbell HBL 1222 or equal Three way Hubbell HBL 1223 or equal Four way Hubbell HBL 1224 or equal Single pole w /pilot lite _ Hubbell HBL 1221-PL7 or equal Single pole, key switch _ Hubbell HBL 1221-L or equal Momentary contact type _ Hubbell HBL 1557 or equal

Notes: For switch wi pilot light, light is "ON" when load is "ON" For momentary contact type switch, operation is 3 position (2 cqt. momentary. contact and center off. Verify color selection wi Architectl Engineer

C. Dimmer switches shall be solid-state, mount in outlet boxes as shown per the following: a. Incandescent lamp dimmer shall be modular type, 120V, 60Hz, switch poles and

wattage indicated, wi sliding dimmer control tab & anodized alum. face w Is oft-tap onoff switch. Equip wi electromagnetic filter to eliminate noise, RF and TV interference, and 5-inch min. wire connecting leads. Derate dimmer switch where dimmers are ganged together per manufacturer.

b. Fluorescent lamp dimmer shall be full-wave modular type AC dimmer, wattage and voltage ratings indicated. Equip wi electromagnetic filter as per incandescent dimmers. Construct wi continuously adjustable trim potentiometer wi adjustment of low and dimming, anodized heat sinks, and quiet on-off switch wi 5" min. wire connecting leads. Dimming devices to be approved for use in writing by ballast manufacturer.

D. Wiring device accessories: a. Wall plates shall have metal screws matching plate finish, smooth high-impact

resistant plastic @ interiors. Voice, data, video system outlets same, except 3/8" or 1" rubber grommets. Surface mounted boxes to be zinc coated sheet steel rounded edges. Kitchenl food prep. areas to polished stainless steel, 0.40 in. thick Exterior to be weatherproof, corrosion-resistant type, die cast aluminum wi self-closing gasketed cover for duplex recept. Use Hubbell 5206-WO; for wall switches use Hubbell 7420.

b. Floor service outlets shall be modular, above-floor constructed of die-cast aluminum, satin finish. Outlets to be 20 amp, 120V, gray wi 3,4." or 1" NPT, 1" long locking nipple.

c. Poke-through Assembly Devices shall be multi-channeled thru-floor raceway I firestop and below-floor junction box assembly, either die-cast satin- finish pedestal type or brass flush-floor type.

d. Telephonel Power Service Poles shall be finish treatment and color as selected by Architectl Engineer.

E. OCCUPANCY SENSORS Provide units manufactured by The Watt Watcher, and Leviton or approved equal for either

(.. single direction coverage pattern (MSA) or a two-way pattern MSB). One-way pattern sensors shall cover up to 875 SF of1lz step motion and 638 SF of working-at-desk-mot ion-



Leviton or equal. Two-way pattern sensors shall cover 1872 SF of Vz step motion and working at desk motion- Leviton. Sensors shall contain timing circuitry to provide user adjustable 'time to light off' delay of 15 seconds to 15 minutes. User controls shall be recessed and sensors shall be surface mounted to a 4" sq. outlet box w / standard fixture ring using a Leviton adapter plate or equal. Provide manual override switch in the sensor to allow load to be turned on without tools in the event of sensor failure. Sensors shall be replaceable in the event of failure without disturbing hard wiring. Provide a ceiling sensor guard at all occupancy sensors- Leviton. Switchpack shall provide 15 VDC power to sensors (5 max.) & perform relay switching ofload. Relay contacts shall be isolated and have ratings of 20A-120VAC or 20A-277VAC as required for location. Mount switchpack to cover plate of a standard 4" junction box, with or without an extension ring. Supply single locknut required for each switchpack.

2.3 WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES

A. Wall plates: single and combination, of types, sizes, and with ganging and cutouts as indicated. Provide plates which mate and match with wiring devices to which attached. Provide metal screws for securing plates to devices with screw heads colored to match finish of plates. Provide wall plate color to match wiring devices except as otherwise indicated. Provide wall plates with engraved legend where indicated. Conform to requirements of Section "Electrical Identification." Provide plates possessing the following additional construction features:

1. Material and Finish: steel plate with wrinkled finish, baked-on white insulating enamel.

2. Material and Finish: 0.04 inch thick, type 302 satin finished stainless steel. 3. Material and Finish: 0.04 inch thick brass, brushed. 4. Material and Finish: 0.04 inch thick brass, satin chrome plated. 5. Material and Finish: 0.05 inch thick aluminum, anodized. 6. Material and Finish: steel plate, galvanized. 7. Material and Finish: plastic, ribbed. 8. Material and Finish: plastic, smooth.

B. Floor Service Outlets: modular, above-floor floor service outlets and fittings of types and ratings indicated. Construct of die cast aluminum, satin finish. Use design compatible with floor outlet wiring methods indicated. Provide 20-amperes, 125-volts, gray duplex receptacles. NEMA configuration 5-20R where indicated. Provide with 3/4 inch or 1 inch NPT, 1 inch long, locking nipple for installation where compatible with wiring method.

c. Poke-Through Assembly Devices: factory-fabricated poke-through assembly devices with modular, above-floor service outlets, multi-channeled thru-floor raceway/fire stop assembly and below-floor junction box assembly. Construct above floor service fitting of die cast, satin finished aluminum with 20-ampere, 125-volts, gray duplex NEMA 5-20R receptacle and modular communication/data service outlet with separation barrier between power and low-tension section. Provide integral assembly UL listed as a total unit, with fire rating consistent with that of floor penetrated.

D. Telephone/Power Service Poles: factory-assembled combination telephone/power poles of types, sizes and ratings indicated; for use with telephone and power systems


l

Section 16143 - Page 5 of 7 WIRING DEVICES

installed above suspended ceilings. Construct with provisions for one 50-pair telephone cable, and (2), 1S-amperes, 12S-volts, 3-wire receptacles. Isolate power section from telephone compartment with separating metal barrier. Extend wiring from receptacles to junction box at top of pole where connections are made above suspended ceiling. Provide ceiling trim plate and pole foot with carpet pad. Where poles are located in accessible ceiling areas, provide bracing arranged for positive connection to ceiling supports. Provide finish treatment and color as selected by the Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES AND ACCESSORIES:

A. Install wiring devices and accessories as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements.

B. Coordinate with other Work, including painting, electrical boxes and wiring installations, as necessary to interface installation of wiring devices with other Work.

C. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean; free from building materials, dirt, and debris.

D. Install galvanized steel wallplates in unfinished spaces.

E. Install wiring devices after wiring work is completed.

F. Install wall plates after painting work is completed.

G. Install telephone/power service poles in accordance with final furnishings arrangement plan, plumb, true, and secure.

H. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for wiring devices. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A. Use properly scaled torque indicating hand tool.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed components from damage. Replace damaged items prior to final acceptance.


A. Testing: Prior to energizing circuits, test wiring for electrical continuity, and for shortcircuits. Ensure proper polarity of connections is maintained. Subsequent to energizing, test wiring devices and demonstrate compliance with requirements, operating each operable device at least six times.



B. Test ground fault interruptor operation with both local and remote fault simulations in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.

C. TABLE 1 (See Evaluations, Ref3)

RECEPTACLES

DESIG- CURRENT NATION RATING

NEMA CONFIG-

ilL AMPS VOLTAGE SINGLE/ RATING DUPLEX URATION UL GRADE

20 125 DUPLEX 5-20R HEAVY DUTY

H 20 125 DUPLEX 5-20R HOSPITAL 20 125 SINGLE 5-20R HEAVY

DUTY C 15 125 SINGLE 5-20R GEN.

DUTY WP 20 125 DUPLEX 5-20R HEAVY

DUTY WP GFI 20125 DUPLEX 5-20R HEAVY INTEGRAL

DUTY 20 480 SINGLE LI6-20R HEAVY

NOTES

(1) Letter designations are used where symbols alone do not clearly designate on plans locations where specific receptacle types are used.

(2) Item is a clock type outlet with device recessed below face of cover plate and with hood to hang clock.

(3) Protects downstream receptacles on same circuit. (4) Provide matching cap.

3.3.1 TABLE 2 (See Evaluations, Ref 3)

SNAP SWITCHES

DUTY

DESIG- VOLTAGE NATION TYPICAL LOAD RATING

ilL APPLICATION RATING fACL POLES

NOTES

(2)

WEATHER-PROOF

GFI (3) (4)

UL GRADE

S CONTROL 20A 120/2771 HEAVY DUTY-LIGHTS

S3 CONTROL 20A 120/277 3-way HEAVY DUTY-LIGHTS

S DISCONN. lHP 120/2771 HEAVY DUTY (2)


NOTES

J

MOTOR


S

SP

DISCONN. 2HP MOTOR SWITCH & 20A

115/5753 HEAVY DUTY (2)

120/2771 HEAVY DUTY (3) PILOT LIGHT

SD DIMMER SWITCH 600W 120 1

NOTES

(1) For snap switches, designation is the same as the symbol used on plans for the device. Type of switch is determined from plan context including type of device or circuit being controlled.

(2) No overload element in switch. (3) Pilot light "on" when switch is "on". (4) Derate dimmer switch per manufacturer's

recommendations where dimmers are ganged together.


HEAVY DUTY (4)


-\ - I

SECTION 16170 - CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS

lPART - GENERAL


Section 16170 - Page 1 of 3 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS



1. Basic Electrical Requirements 2. Fuses

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes circuit and motor disconnects.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data for each type of product specified.

B. Maintenance data for circuit and motor disconnects, for inclusion in Operation and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1 and Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Requirements. "


A. Electrical Component Standards: Provide components complying with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code" and which are listed and labeled by UL. Comply with UL Standard 98 and NEMA Standard KS 1.

2PART - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering productswhich may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:


1. 2.

Appleton Challenger

Shafter-Wasco Irrigation District - Office- #01-267

Section 16170 - Page 2 of 3 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS

3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Crouse-Hinds Co. Cutler-Hammer Inc. Furnas Electric Co. General Electric Co. General Switch Corp. Square D Company. Westinghouse Electric Corp.

2.2 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES

A. General: Provide circuit and motor disconnect switches in types, sizes, duties, features ratings, and enclosures as indicated. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure except for outdoor switches, and other indicated locations provide NEMA 3R enclosures with raintight hubs. For motor and motor starter disconnects, provide units with horsepower ratings suitable to the loads.

B. Fusible Switches: (general duty) (heavy duty) switches, with fuses of classes and current ratings indicated. See Section "FUSES" for specifications. Where current limiting fuses are indicated, provide switches with non-interchangeable feature suitable only for current limiting type fuses.

C. Non-fusible Disconnects: (general duty) (heavy duty) switches of classes and current ratings as indicated.

D. Double-Throw Switches: (general duty) (heavy duty) switches of classes and current ratings as indicated.

E. Bolted Pressure Switches: bolted pressure switches conforming to and listed under UL Standard 977; single or double-throw arrangement as indicated. Forfusible units provide fuses as indicated.

F. Service Switches: (general duty) (heavy duty) fusible switches. UL listed for use as service equipment under UL Standard 98 or 869.

G. Switches for Classified (Hazardous) Locations: heavy duty switches, with UL labels and listings for hazardous location classifications in which installed.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Electrical Interlocks: Provide number and arrangement of interlock contacts in switches as indicated.

B. Special Enclosure Material: Provide special enclosure material as follows for switches indicated:

1. Stainless Steel Type 304. 2. Molded fiberglass reinforced plastic. 3. Heavy cast aluminum.


( ..

. )

Section 16170 - Page 3 of3 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS

c. Captive Fuse Pullers: Provide built-in fuse pullers arranged to facilitate fuse removal.

3PART - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS

A. General: Provide circuit and motor disconnect switches as indicated and where required by the above Code. Comply with switch manufacturers' printed installation instructions.


A. Testing: Subsequent to completion of installation of electrical disconnect switches, energize circuits and demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Except as otherwise indicated, do not test switches by operating them under load. However, demonstrate switch operation through six opening/closing cycles with circuit unloaded. Open each switch enclosure for inspection of interior, mechanical and electrical connections, fuse installation, and for verification of type and rating of fuses installed. Correct deficiencies then retest to demonstrate compliance. Remove and replace defective units with new units and retest.


Shafter-Wasco Irrigation District - Office- #01-267

(

SECTION 16190 - SUPPORTING DEVICES

lPART - GENERAL


Section 16190 - Page 1 of 6 SUPPORTING DEVICES



1. "Basic Electrical Requirements." 2. "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes secure support from the building structure for electrical items by means of hangers, supports, anchors, sleeves, inserts, seals, and associated fastenings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data for each type of product specified.

1. Hanger and support schedule showing manufacturer's figure number, size, spacing, features, and application for each required type of hanger, support, sleeve, seal, and fastener to be used.

C. Shop drawings indicating details of fabricated products and materials.

D. Engineered Design consisting of details and engineering analysis for supports for the following items:


A. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code."

B. Electrical components shall be listed and labeled by UL, ETL, CSA, or other approved, nationally recognized testing and listing agency that provides third-party certification follow-up services.

2PART - PRODUCTS



2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Slotted Metal Angle and V-Channel Systems:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit b. American Electric c. B-Line Systems, Inc. d. Cinch Clamp Co., Inc. e. GS Metals Corp. f. Haydon Corp. g. Kin-Line, Inc. h. Vnistrut Diversified Products

2. Conduit Sealing Bushings:

a. Bridgeport Fittings, Inc. b. Cooper Industries, Inc. c. Elliott Electric Mfg. Corp. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Killark Electric Mfg. Co. f. Madison Equipment Co. g. L.E. Mason Co. h. O-ZjGedney i. Producto Electric Corp. j. Raco, Inc. k Red Seal Electric Corp. 1. Spring City Electrical Mgf. Co. m. Thomas & Betts Corp.

2.2 COATINGS

A. Coating: Supports, support hardware, and fasteners shall be protected with zinc coating or with treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish,or inherent material characteristic. Products for use outdoors shall be hot-dip galvanized.

2.3 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. Raceway Supports: Clevis hangers, riser clamps, conduit straps, threaded C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring steel clamps.

B. Fasteners: Types, materials, and construction features as follows:


1. Expansion Anchors: Carbon steel wedge or sleeve type. 2. Toggle Bolts: All steel springhead type.


3. Powder-Driven Threaded Studs: Heat-treated steel, designed specifically for the intended service.

C. Conduit Sealing Bushings: Factory-fabricated watertight conduit sealing bushing assemblies suitable for sealing around conduit, or tubing passing through concrete floors and walls. Construct seals with steel sleeve, malleable iron body, neoprene sealing grommets or rings, metal pressure rings, pressure clamps, and cap screws.

D. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug for nonarmored electrical cables in riser conduits. Provide plugs with number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Construct body of malleable-iron casting with hot-dip galvanized finish.

E. U-Channel Systems: 16-gage steel channels, with 9/16-inch-diameter holes, at a minimum of 8 inches on center, in top surface. Provide fittings and accessories that mate and match with U-channel and are of the same manufacture.

2.4 FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. General: Shop- or field-fabricated supports or manufactured supports assembled from Uchannel components.

B. Steel Brackets: Fabricated of angles, channels, and other standard structural shapes. Connect with welds and machine bolts to form rigid supports.

C. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following:

1. Sheet Metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with snaplock joint, welded spiral seams, or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate sleeves from the following gage metal for sleeve diameter noted:

a. 3-inch and smaller: 20-gage. b. 4-inch to 6-inch: 16-gage. c. over 6-inch: 14-gage.

2. Steel Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe. 3. Plastic Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 80 PVC plastic pipe.

3PART - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install supporting devices to fasten electrical components securely and permanently in accordance with NEC requirements.



B. Coordinate with the building structural system and with other electrical installation.

C. Raceway Supports: Comply with the NEC and the following requirements:

1. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for selection and installation of supports.

2. Strength of each support shall be adequate to carry present and future load multiplied by a safety factor of at least four. Where this determination results in a safety allowance ofless than 200 lbs, provide additional strength until there is a minimum of 200 lbs safety allowance in the strength of each support.

3. Install individual and multiple (trapeze) raceway hangers and riser clamps as necessary to support raceways. Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assembly and for securing hanger rods and conduits.

4. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze-type hangers. 5. Support individual horizontal raceways by separate pipe hangers. Spring steel

fasteners may be used in lieu of hangers only for l-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving lighting and receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings only. For hanger rods with spring steel fasteners, use l/4-inch-diameter or larger threaded steel. Use spring steel fasteners that are specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing.

6. Space supports for raceways in accordance with Table I of this section. Space supports for raceway types not covered by the above in accordance with NEe.

7. Support exposed and concealed raceway within 1 foot of an unsupported box and access fittings. In horizontal runs, support at the box and access fittings may be omitted where box or access fittings are independently supported and raceway terminals are not made with chase nipples or threadless box connectors.

8. In vertical runs, arrange support so the load produced by the weight of the . raceway and the enclosed conductors is carried entirely by the conduit supports with no weight load on raceway terminals.

D. Vertical Conductor Supports: Install simultaneously with installation of conductors.

E. Miscellaneous Supports: Support miscellaneous electrical components as required to produce the same structural safety factors as specified for raceway supports. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnects, control enclosures, pull boxes, junction boxes, transformers, and other devices.

F. In open overhead spaces, cast boxes threaded to raceways need not be supported separately except where used for fixture support; support sheet metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. Where bar hangers are used, attach the bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with an approved type of fastener not more than 24 inches from the box.

G. Sleeves: Install in concrete slabs and walls and all other fire- rated floors and walls for raceways and cable installations. For sleeves through fire rated-wall or floor construction, apply UL- listed firestopping sealant in gaps between sleeves and enclosed conduits and cables in accordance with "Fire Resistant Joint Sealers" requirement of


Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers."

Section 16190 - Page 5 of6 SUPPORTING DEVICES

H. Conduit Seals: Install seals for conduit penetrations of slabs on grade and exterior walls below grade and where indicated. Tighten sleeve seal screws until sealing grommets have expanded to form watertight seal.

I. Fastening: Unless otherwise indicated, fasten electrical items and their supporting hardware securely to the building structure, including but not limited to conduits, raceways, cables, cable trays, busways, cabinets, panelboards, transformers, boxes, disconnect switches, and control components in accordance with the following:

1. Fasten by means of wood screws or screw-type nails on wood, toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or solid masonry, and machine screws, welded threaded studs, or spring-tension clamps on steel. Threaded studs driven by a powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts may be used instead of expansion bolts and machine or wood screws. Do not weld conduit, pipe straps, or items other than threaded studs to steel structures. In partitions of light steel construction, use sheet metal screws.

2. Holes cut to depth of more than 1-1/2 inches in reinforced concrete beams or to depth of more than 3/4 inch in concrete shall not cut the main reinforcing bars. Fill holes that are not used.

3. Ensure that the load applied to any fastener does not exceed 25 percent of the proof test load. Use vibration- and shock- resistant fasteners for attachments to concrete slabs.

J. TESTS: Test pull-out resistance of one of each type, size, and anchorage material for the following fastener types:

1. Expansion anchors. 2. Toggle bolts. 3. Powder-driven threaded studs.

K. Provide all jacks, jigs, fixtures, and calibrated indicating scales required for reliable testing. Obtain the structural Engineer's approval before transmitting loads to the structure. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load for fastener. If fastening fails test, revise all similar fastener installations and retest until satisfactory results are achieved.

3.2 TABLE I: SPACING FOR RACEWAY SUPPORTS

HORIZONTAL RUNS

Raceway Size (Inches)

1/2,3/4 1/2,3/4

No. of Conductors in Run

lor 2 lor 2

Location

Flat ceiling or wall. Where it is difficult to provide supports except at intervals

RMC& IMC

L11-

5 7

EMT RNC ill ill

5 7

3



fixed by the building construction.

1/2,3/4 3 or more Any location. 1/2-1 3 or more Any location. 1 & larger 1 or 2 Flat ceiling or wall. 1 & larger 1 or 2 Where it is difficult

1 & larger 3 or more Any

VERTICAL RUNS

Raceway Size (Inches)

1/2,3/4 1,1-1/4 1-1/2 and larger .... Up to 2 2-1/2 3 & larger Any

NOTES:

to provide supports except at intervals fixed by the building construction.

Any location. Concealed.

No. of Conductors in Run

Exposed.

Location

Exposed. Exposed. 10 Shaftway. Shaftway. Shaftway. Concealed. 10

(1) Maximum spacing of supports (feet). (2) Maximum spacings for IMC above apply to straight runs

only. Otherwise the maximums for EMT apply.

Abbreviations: EMT Electrical metallic tubing.


IMC Intermediate metallic conduit. RMC Rigid metallic conduit. RNC Rigid nonmetallic conduit.


7

6 10

10 10

RMC& IMC

LUl

7 8 10 14 16 20 10

7

6 10

10 10

EMT

ill

7 8

10 10 10

RNC

ill

SECTION 16420 - SERVICE ENTRANCE

1PART - GENERAL


Section 16420 - Page 1 of9 SERVICE ENTRANCE

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-l Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

B. Division-16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods sections apply to work specified in this section.

1.2 SUMMARY:

A. Extent of service-entrance work is indicated by drawings and schedules.

B. Types of service-entrance equipment in this section include the following:

1. Circuit-breakers. 2. Fuses. 3. Meter sockets. 4. Switches.

C. Switchgear and switchboards used for service-entrance equipment are specified in other Division-16 sections.

D. Transformers used for service-entrance equipment are specified in another Division-16 section.

E. Motor control centers used for service-entrance equipment are specified in another Division-16 section.

F. Wires/cables, raceways, and electrical boxes and fittings are specified in Division-16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods sections, "Wires and Cables", "Raceways", and "Electrical Boxes and Fittings."

G. Refer to other Division-16 sections for wires/cables, raceways, and electrical boxes and fittings work required in connection with service-entrance equipment.

1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on service-entrance equipment and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned layouts of service-entrance equipment, including spatial relationships to proximate electrical equipment.

C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit power, signal and control wiring diagrams for service-



entrance work. Differentiate between portions of wiring/ cabling that are manufacturerinstalled and portions that are field-installed.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of serviceentrance equipment, of types, sizes, and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 5 years of successful installation experience with projects utilizing service-entrance work similar to that required for this project.

C. Codes and Standards:

1. Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local code requirements of the authority having jurisdiction and NEC, including Articles 230, 250, and 338, as applicable to installation, and construction of service-entrances.

2. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable construction and installation requirements of the following NEMA standards for service-entrance equipment and accessories:

a. b. c. d. e.

f. g. h.

Stds Pub/No. AB 1: Molded-Case Circuit Breakers. Stds Pub/No. AB 3: Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Their Application. Stds Pub/No. KS 1: Enclosed Switches. Stds Pub/No. PB 2: Deadfront Distribution Switchboards. Stds Pub/No. PB 2.2: Application Guide for Ground-fault Protective Devices for Equipment. Stds Pub/No. SG 3: Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breakers. Stds Pub/No. SG 4: Alternating-Current High-Voltage Circuit Breakers. Stds Pub/No. SG 5: Power Switchgear Assemblies.

3. UL Compliance: Comply with construction and installation requirements of the following UL standards for service-entrance equipment and accessories:

a. UL 50: Electrical Cabinets and Boxes. b. UL 489: Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures. c. UL 854: Service-Entrance Cables. d. UL 869: Electrical Service Equipment.

4. Provide service-entrance equipment and accessories which are UL-listed and labeled, and marked, "SUITABLE FOR USE AS SERVICE EQUIPMENT."

5. IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of IEEE Std 241 pertaining to service entrances.

6. ANSI Compliance: Comply with ANSI C2, "National Electrical Safety Code", installation requirements for aboveground service-entrance conductors.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:

A. Deliver service-entrance equipment components properly packaged and mounted on


( \

I· \ .


pallets, or skids to facilitate handling of heavy items. Utilize factory-fabricated type containers or wrappings for service-entrance equipment and components which protect equipment from damage. Install gravity measuring meters in containers which indicate whether container has been bumped or dropped. Return G-meters to manufacturer for reuse upon delivery of switchgear. Inspect equipment to ensure that no damage has occurred during shipment.

B. Store service-entrance equipment in original packaging and protect from weather and construction traffic. Wherever possible, store indoors; where necessary to store outdoors, store above grade and enclose with watertight wrapping.

C. Handle service-entrance equipment carefully to prevent physical damage to equipment and components. Remove packaging, including the opening of crates and containers, avoiding the use of excessive hammering and jarring which would damage the electrical equipment contained therein. Do not install damaged equipment; remove from site and replace damaged equipment with new.

1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING:

A. Schedule delivery of service-entrance equipment which permits ready building ingress for large equipment components to their designated installation spaces. Coordinate delivery of equipment with the installation of other building components.

B. Coordinate the size and location of concrete equipment pads. Cast anchor bolt inserts into pad. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.

C. Coordinate with other electrical work including raceways, electrical boxes and fittings, and cabling/wiring work, as necessary to interface installation of service-entrance work with other work.

1.7 MAINTENANCE:

A. Maintenance Stock, Fuses: For types and ratings required, furnish additional fuses, amounting to one unit for every 10 installed units, but not less than 5 units of each.

2PART - PRODUCTS

2.1 SERVICE-ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT:

A. General: Provide service-entrance equipment and accessories; of types, sizes, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published product information, and as required for complete installation; and as herein specified.

B. Circuit Breakers: Except as otherwise indicated, provide circuit breakers and ancillary components, of types, sizes, ratings, and electrical characteristics indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard design, materials, components, and construction



in accordance with published product information, and as required for a complete installation.

1. Air Circuit Breakers: Provide factory-assembled, electronically operated, lowvoltage air circuit breakers, 600 VAC 50/60 Hz, 3-phase, 3-wire, back connected, envelope size rating 800 amperes; frame size rating of 800, 100 percent equipment rated, continuous current rating of 400 amperes, 50,000 RMS symmetrical amperes interrupting capacity rating; and with 24-volts closing relays for operating breakers. Provide bolted type stationary-mounted breaker elements with NEMA Type 3R raintight enclosures. Construct with ground-fault protection devices as: integral part of breakers, with delay of 0.21 seconds at 225 amperes. Construct breaker with solid-state overcurrent trip devices; and equip circuit breakers with solid-state controls and programming units possessing the following operating features:

2.

3.

a. Adjustable current setting. b. Adjustable long-time pickup and delay. c. Adjustable short-time pickup and delay. d. Adjustable instantaneous pickup. e. Adjustable ground fault pickup. f. Overload and short circuit trip indicators. g. Local and remote target indication. h. Circuit Breaker Accessories: Provide the following air circuit breaker

accessories:

1) Shunt trip. 2) Undervoltage release. 3) Bell alarm with lockout. 4) Auxiliary contacts. 5) Enclosure-mounted interlock

Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Provide molded-case current-limiting circuit breakers rated 250 amperes, 480-volts, 60 Hz, 2-poles, with interrupting ratings of 100,000 RMS, or less, symmetrical amperes. Select breakers with common trip, and thermal-magnetic circuitry with independently operating limiter elements in series with each pole which automatically resets after circuit interruptions. Provide limiters with let-through current range of 110-125 amperes. Construct with overcenter, trip-free toggle-type mechanism with quick-make, quick-break action and positive handle indication. Provide current-limiting breakers with permanent trip units containing individual thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole. Calibrate trip elements for 40 deg C ambient temperature. Select circuit breakers with mechanical screw type lugs for use with copper conductors. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers: Provide factory-assembled, molded-case circuit breakers offrame sizes indicated; rated 1600 amperes, 600-volts, 60 Hz, 3-poles with 75,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting ratings. Provide breakers with permanent thermal and instantaneous magnetic trips in each pole, and with faultcurrent limiting protection, ampere ratings as indicated. Construct with overcenter, trip-free, toggle-type operating mechanisms with quick-make, quickbreak action and positive handle trip indication. Provide push-to-trip button on


".'i )

Section 16420 - Page 5 of 9 SERVICE ENTRANCE

enclosure cover for mechanically tripping circuit breakers. Construct breakers for mounting and operating in any physical position and operating in an ambient temperature of 40 deg C. Provide breakers with mechanical screw type removable connector lugs, AL/CU rated, and with NEMA Type 1 general purpose enclosures.

a. Internal Breaker Accessories: Provide the following internal circuit breaker accessories:

1) Shunt trip. 2) Auxiliary contacts. 3) Alarm switch. 4) Undervoltage trip.

4. Solid-State Trip Circuit Breakers: Provide solid-state trip circuit breakers rated 800 amperes, 480-volts, 60 Hz, 3-poles, with 100,000 RMS symmetrical ampere interrupting ratings. Construct breakers with ampere setting adjustment knobs for changing current carrying capability of units, and with ground-fault protection components with external neutral current transformer (CT). Provide electronic components for timing and monitoring internal currents and for initiating automatic tripping action. Construct with trip-free mechanisms, and with positive handle indication. Provide push-to-trip button on cover for mechanical tripping circuit breakers. Construct breakers for mounting in any physical position and operating in an ambient temperature of 40 deg C. Select breakers with mechanical screw type removable connectors, AL/CU rated, and with NEMA Type 1 general purpose enclosures.

5. Insulated Case Circuit Breakers: Provide factory-assembled, electronically operated, insulated case circuit breakers, 600 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 3-phase, 3-wire, back connected, envelope size rating 3000 amperes, frame size rating of 2500 amperes, 100 percent equipment rated, continuous current rating 1600 amperes, 65,000 RMS symmetrical amperes interrupting capacity rating. Provide draw-out breaker elements with NEMA Type 1 general purpose enclosures. Construct with ground-fault protection sensors as integral part of breakers, with delay 0.21 seconds at 400 amperes. Equip circuit breakers with solid-state controls and programming units possessing the following operating features:

a. Adjustable current, long time delay. b. Adjustable intermediate delay. c. Ground-fault pickup and delay. d. Adjustable instantaneous pickup. e. Short time pickup and delay. f. Overload, short-circuit and ground-fault target indicators. g. Local and remote target indication. h. Circuit Breaker Accessories: Provide the following insulated case circuit

breaker accessories:

1) Shunttrip. 2) Undervoltage release. 3) Bell alarm with lockout. 4) Auxiliary contacts.



5) Enclosure-mounted interlock.

C. Interrupter Switches and Fuse Units: Provide interrupter switches and fuse units; consisting of 3-pole, single-throw switch with 3 power fuses; front-mounted operating handle with mechanical interlock between switch and access door to fuses; with underground cable entry and set of terminal blocks, small wiring and ground bus, as indicated.

D. Fuses: Provide fuses complying with Division-16 Service and Distribution section entitled "Fuses," in accordance with the following listed electrical characteristics:

1. Class L time-delay. 2. Class L fast-acting. 3. Class RKI time delay. 4. Class RKI current-limiting. 5. Class J current-limiting. 6. Class RK5 time-delay. 7. Class KS one-time. S. Class H. 9. Class T.

E. Meter Sockets:

1. General: Provide meter sockets which comply with requirements oflocal utility company supplying electrical power to service- entrance equipment of building project.

2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering meter sockets which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide meter sockets of one of the following (fot each type of meter):

a. Circle AW Products Co. b. Duncan Electric Co Inc. c. Federal Pacific Electric Co. d. General Electric Co. e. GTE Sylvania Inc. f. Square D Co.

F. Switches:

1. General: Provide safety switches complying with Division-16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section, "Circuit and Motor Disconnects", in accordance with the following listing:

a. Heavy-Duty Safety Switches, provide with NEMA Type 1 enclosures.

G. Cables/Wires:



1. General: Provide cables/wires complying with Division-16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section "Wires and Cables", in accordance with the following listing:

a. Type SE, copper cable for aboveground installation. Type USE, copper cable for underground installation.

H. Raceways:

1. General: Provide raceways complying with Division-16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section "Raceways", in accordance with the following listing:

a. Rigid Steel Conduit, and fittings.

2.2 SERVICE-ENTRANCE ACCESSORIES:

A. Service-Entrance Caps: Provide service-entrance cable caps, of types, sizes, and number of cable holes indicated; with keyhole mounting brackets, suitable for use with Type SE cable. Construct of weather-resistant hot dip galvanized malleable iron, with clamping shoe in cap to hold cable, and with overlap cover to protect cables from weather.

B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering service-entrance caps which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide service-entrance caps of one of the following:

1. Allen-Stevens Conduit Fittings Corp. 2. Anchor Electric Co. 3. Burndy Corp. 4. Crouse-Hinds Co. 5. Killark Elect Mfg Co. 6. Midland-Ross Corp. 7. o-z Gedney Co. 8. Raco Inc. 9. Thomas and Betts Corp.

D. Wall and Floor Seals: Provide wall and floor seals complying with Division-16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section."Supporting Devices", in accordance with the following listing: .

1. Wall and Floor Seals.

3PART - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION:



A. Examine areas and conditions under which service-entrance equipment and components are to be installed, and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work Do not proceed with the work until satisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF SERVICE-ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT:

A. Install service-entrance equipment as indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that service-entrance equipment fulfills requirements. Comply with applicable installation requirements of NEC and NEMA standards.

B. Install fuses, if any, in service-entrance equipment.

C. Install ground-fault protection devices complying with electrical winding polarities indicated.

D. Install units on vibration isolators in accordance with Division-1S section; and comply with manufacturer's indicated method of installation.

E. Set field-adjustable GFP devices and circuit breakers for pickup and time-current sensitivity ranges as indicated, subsequent to installation of devices and CB's.

F. Install fuses, of size indicated, in each switchgear.

G. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Stds 486A and B, and the National Electrical Code.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:

A. Prior to energization of service-entrance equipment, check accessible connections for compliance to manufacturer's torque tightening specifications.

B. Prior to energization of service-entrance equipment, check with ground resistance tester, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled.

C. Prior to energization, check circuitry for electrical continuity, and for short-circuits.

3.4 GROUNDING:

A. Provide equipment grounding connections for service-entrance equipment as indicated. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Std 486A to assure permanent and effective grounding.

3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:



A. Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement.

B. Touch-up scratched or marred enclosure surfaces to match original finishes.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION:

A. Upon completion of installation of service-entrance equipment and electrical circuitry, energized circuitry and demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and retest to demonstrate compliance.



/'

I ) l

Section 16425 - Page 1 of14 SWITCHBOARDS

SECTION 16425 - SWITCHBOARDS

lPART - GENERAL





1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes low-voltage power service and distribution switchboards and associated auxiliary equipment rated 600 V or less.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A.

B.

C.

General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

Product data for each product and component specified.

Shop drawings for each switchboard including dimensioned plans and elevations, component and device lists, and a single-line diagram showing main and branch bus current ratings and short-time and short-circuit ratings of switchboard.

D. Shop drawings or other descriptive documentation of optional barriers specified for electrical insulation and isolation.

E. Shop drawings of utility company metering provisions with indication of approval by utility company.

F. Shop drawings of spare fuse cabinet showing material, dimensions, and features including storage provisions for fuse cartons.

G. Schedule of features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual protective devices.

H. Manufacturer's Schematic Wiring Diagram.

I. Point-to-Point Control Wiring Diagram: Differentiating between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring (may be submitted upon delivery of switchboard).

J. Mimic bus diagram and color samples. Submit updated version of diagram reflecting



field changes after final switchboard load connections have been made.

K. Installer Certificate Signed by Contractor: The sign technician for the mimic bus meets the experience qualifications specified under "Quality Assurance."

L. Qualification data for field-testing organization certificates, signed by the Contractor, certifying that the organization complies with the requirements specified in Quality Assurance below. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of Architects and Owners, plus other information specified.

M. Report of field tests and observations certified by the testing organization.

N. Maintenance data for materials and products, for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1 and in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Requirements. "

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE IZl

A. Listing and Labeling: Provide switchboard assemblies that are listed and labeled.

1. The terms "listed" and "labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.

Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

B. Field-Testing Organization Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, the testing organization must demonstrate, based on evaluation of organization-submitted criteria conforming to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to conduct satisfactorily the testing indicated.

C. Sign Technician Qualifications: Engage an experienced sign technician who is a professional installer/painter of signs to execute the mimic bus.

D. Mimic Bus Mock-Up: Prior to installation of mimic bus, fabricate the portion of the mimic bus, including lettered graphics and symbols, applicable to one section of the switchboard. Obtain Architect's acceptance of mock-up before starting final unit of Work Retain accepted mock-up as a standard for judging the balance of mimic bus execution. Accepted mock-up may become a part of completed Work

E. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code."

F. NEMA Standard: Comply with NEMA Standard PB2, "Deadfront Distribution Switchboards. "

G. UL Standard: Comply with UL 891, "Deadfront Switchboards."

H. Product Selection for Restricted Space: The Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for switchboard equipment including clearances between switchboard and adjacent



surfaces and items. Switchboards having equal performance characteristics and complying with indicated maximum dimensions may be considered.


A. Deliver in shipping splits oflengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path as indicated.

B. Store so condensation will not occur on or in switchboards. Provide temporary heaters as required to assure avoiding condensation.

C. Handle switchboards in accordance with NEMA Standard PB2.1, "General Instructions for Proper Handling, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Deadfront Distribution Switchboards." Use factory-installed lifting provisions.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Spare Fuses: Six spares of each type and rating of fuse and fusible devices used. Include spares for:

1. Potential transformer fuses. 2. Control power fuses. 3. Fuses and fusible devices for fused circuit breakers. 4. Fuses for fusible switches. 5. Fuses for fused power circuit devices.

B. Spare Indicating Lights: Six of each type installed.

C. Touch-Up Paint: Three half-pint containers.

2PART - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. ABB Power Distribution, Inc. 2. American Circuit Breaker Corp. 3. Automatic Switch Co. 4. Challenger Electrical Equipment Corp. 5. Crouse-Hinds Distribution Equipment. 6. Eaton Corp. 7. General Electric Co.


Section 16425 - Page 4 of 14 SWITCHBOARDS

8. Kohler Co. 9. Lake Shore Industries. 10. Onan Corp. 11. Russelectric, Inc. 12. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 13. Square D Co. 14. Westinghouse Electric Corp. 15. Zenith Controls, Inc.

2.2 SWITCHBOARDS, GENERAL

A. Description: Front-connected, front-accessible, with panel-mounted main device, panelmounted branches, and sections rear aligned.

B. Description: Front-connected, front-accessible, with fixed, individually mounted main device, panel-mounted branches, and sections rear aligned.

C. Description: Front- and side-accessible section for fixed, individually mounted main device, panel-mounted branches, and sections rear aligned.

D. Description: Front- and rear-accessible sections, front and rear aligned, with features as follows:

1. Main Device: Individually fixed mounted. 2. Main Device: Drawout mounted. 3. Branch Devices: Panel mounted. 4. Branch Devices: Individually fixed and panel mounted. 5. Branch Devices: Individually fixed mounted. 6. Branch Devices: Individually compartmented and fixed mounted. 7. Branch Devices: Individually compartmented and drawout mounted.

E. Barriers: Between adjacent switchboard sections.

1. Insulation and isolation for main and vertical buses of feeder sections. 2. Insulation and isolation for main bus of main section and main and vertical bus of

feeder sections.

2.3 FABRICATION AND FEATURES

A. Enclosure: Steel. NEMA 3R, rainproof.

B. Enclosure: Steel. NEMA 3R, rainproof, with interior lighted walk-in aisle. Complete with convenience outlet.

C. Enclosure Finish for Outdoor Units: UL 891, Paragraph 9.22 C.2, manufacturer's standard color. Undersurfaces shall additionally receive a corrosion-resistant undercoating treatment. The finish system shall meet the requirements of tests in accordance with IEEE C37.20.1, "Standard for Metal-Enclosed Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Switchgear," paragraph 5.2.8.


"

!

,(.. IZI


D. Enclosure Finish for Indoor Units: Manufacture standard gray finish over a rust inhibiting primer on phosphatizing treated metal surface. Provide painted surfaces that conform to IEEE C37.20.1, "Standard for Metal-Enclosed Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Switchgear," paragraph 5.2.8.

E. Unusual Service Conditions: Switchboards shall be designed for the following conditions:

F. Space Heaters: Provide switchboards with factory-installed, electric space heaters in each vertical section.

1. Space Heater Control: Thermostat, factory-set to maintain switchboard above dewpoint for anticipated environmental conditions.

2. Space Heater Control: Nonautomatic. Controlled by branch circuit protective device.

3. Space Heater Power Source: Control power transformer factory-mounted in switchboard.

4. Space Heater Power Source: 120-V, indicated external branch circuit.

G. Utility Metering Compartment: Fabricated compartment and section meeting utility company requirements. Where separate vertical section is required for utility metering, match and align with basic switchboard.

H. Bus Transition and Incoming Line Pull Sections: Match and align with basic switchboard.

I. Removable Hinged Rear Covers: Secured by captive thumb screws, for access to rear interior of switchboard.

J. Hinged Front Panels: Provide to allow access to breaker, metering, accessory, and blank compartments.

K. Pull Box on Top of Switchboard: Provide where indicated or where required by installation conditions, and include the following features:

1. Adequate ventilation to maintain air temperature in pull box within same limits as switchboard.

2. Set back from front to clear circuit-breaker removal mechanism. 3. Removable covers forming top, front, and sides. Top covers at rear easily

removable for drilling and cutting. 4. Bottom of insulating, fire-resistant material with separate holes for cable drops

into switchboards. 5. Cable supports arranged to facilitate cabling, and adequate to support cables

indicated including those for future installation.

L. Buses and Connections: Three-phase, four-wire except as otherwise indicated. Features as follows:

1. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of98 percent conductivity


Section 16425 - Page 6 of 14 SWITCHBOARDS

with feeder circuit-breaker line connections. 2. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Tin-plated, high-strength, electrical-grade

aluminum alloy with copper or tin-plated aluminum circuit-breaker line connections.

3. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of98 percent conductivity, or tin-plated, high-strength, electrical-grade aluminum alloy.

a. Where bus is aluminum, use copper or tin plated aluminum for circuitbreaker line connections.

b. Where bus is copper, use copper for feeder circuit-breaker line connections.

4. At load terminals of feeder breakers, provide silver-plated copper bus extensions equipped with pressure terminal connectors for outgoing circuit conductors.

5. Ground Bus: lj4-inch by 2-inch minimum size, hard-drawn copper of98 percent conductivity, and equipped with pressure connector terminations for feeder- and branch-circuit ground conductors. For busway feeders extend insulated equipment grounding cable to busway ground connection and support cable at intervals in vertical run.

6. Supports and Bracing for Buses: Adequate strength for indicated short-circuit currents.

7. Contact Surfaces of Buses: Silver plated. 8. Main Phase Buses, Neutral Bus, and Equipment Ground Bus: Uniform capacity the

entire length of the switchboard main and distribution sections. Provide for future extensions from either end by means of bolt holes or other approved method and connecting links.

9. Isolation Barrier Access Provisions: Permit checking bus bolt tightness. 10. Neutral Buses: 50 percent of the ampacity of the phase buses except as indicated,

equipped with pressure connector terminations for outgoing circuit neutral cables. Provide braced neutral bus extensions for busway feeders with neutral conductors.

11. Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of the phase buses except as indicated and equipped with approved pressure connector terminations for outgoing circuit neutral cables. Provide braced neutral bus extensions for busway feeders with neutral conductors.

M. Bus Bar Insulation: Factory-applied, flame-retardant, 105 deg C minimum tape wrapping of individual bus bars or flame-retardant, spray-applied insulation of the same temperature rating.

1. Sprayed Insulation Thickness: 3 mils, minimum. 2. Bolted Bus Joints: Insulate with joint covers after assembly. Use secure covers

that are easily removed and reinstalled. 3. Phase Bar Load Runbacks from OCPDs: Increase insulation thickness where

clearances prior to insulation are less than required for bare bus. 4. Substitute insulation methods will be considered upon submission, and where

they are shown to provide equivalent electrical and mechanical characteristics to those specified, will be found acceptable.

2.4 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES (OCPDs)



A. Comply with requirements of Division 16 Section "Overcurrent Protective Devices" for types of OCPDs indicated. Provide indicated features, ratings, characteristics, and settings.

B. Future Devices: Where provision for future overcurrent protective devices or space is indicated, equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances, designed for the OCPD types and ampere ratings indicated for future installation of devices.

2.5 OTHER CIRCUIT CONTROL AND PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. General: Factory-installed and -tested devices of types listed below, with indicated ratings, settings, and features.

1. Combination Motor Starter: As specified in Division 16 Section "Motor Controllers." Use units with motor circuit protector disconnects.

2. Combination Motor Starter: As specified in Division 16 Section "Motor Controllers." Use units with fusible switch disconnects.

3. Automatic Transfer Switches: As specified in Division 16 Section "Transfer Switches."

4. Lighting/Appliance Branch-Circuit Panelboards: As specified in Division 16 Section "Panelboards."

5. Surge Arresters: As specified in IEEE C62.11, "Standards for Metal-Oxide Surge Arresters for AC Power Circuits," or IEEE C62.1 "Surge Arresters for Alternating Current Power Circuits."

a. Description: Coordinate impulse sparkover voltage with system circuit voltage, and provide factory mounting and connection.

2.6 INSTRUMENTATION

A. Instrument Transformers: NEMA Standard EI 21.1, "Instrument Transformers for Revenue Metering 110 kV BIL and Less," IEEE Standard C57.13, "Requirements for Instrument Transformers," and the following:

1. Potential Transformers: Secondary voltage rating of 120 V and NEMA accuracy class of 0.3 with burdens ofW, X, and Y.

2. Current Transformers: Ratios as indicated and accuracy class suitable for connected relays, meters, and instruments.

3. Control Power Transformers: Dry type. Separate compartments for units larger than 3 kV and their primary and secondary fuses.

4. Current Transformers for Neutral and Ground Fault Current Sensing: Ground/neutral sensor current transformers located as indicated. Connect secondaries to ground overcurrent relays to provide selective tripping of bus tie and main breaker. Coordinate with feeder breaker ground fault protection.

B. Multifunction Digital Metering Monitor: UL listed or recognized microprocessor-based unit suitable for three- or four-wire systems and with the following features:



1. Inputs: From sensors or current transformers from 100/5 through 5000/5 ratings and potential terminals up to 600 V.

2. Display: Switch selectable digital display of the following values with maximum accuracy tolerances as indicated:

a. Phase currents, each phase, plus or minus 1 percent. b. Phase-to-phase voltages, 3 phase, plus or minus 1 percent. c. Phase-to-neutral voltages, 3 phase, plus or minus 1 percent. d. Megawatts, plus or minus 2 percent. e. Megavars, plus or minus 2 percent. f. Power factor, plus or minus 2 percent. g. Frequency, plus or minus 0.5 percent. h. Megawatt demand with demand interval programmable from 5 to 60

minutes, plus or minus 2 percent. i. Accumulated energy, megawatt hours, plus or minus 2 percent.

Accumulated values unaffected by power outages up to 72 hours.

3. Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semiflush mounted in instrument compartment door.

C. Ammeters, Voltmeters, and Power Factor Meters: ANSI C39.1, "Requirements for Electrical Analog Indicating Instruments."

1. Meters: 4-inch diameter or 6-inch square, flush or semiflush, with antiparallax 250-degree scales and external zero adjustment.

2. Voltmeters: Cover an expanded scale range of normal voltage plus or minus ten percent.

D. Instrument Switches: Rotary type with "off' position.

1. Voltmeter switches: Permit reading all phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral voltages where a neutral is indicated.

2. Ammeter switches: Permit reading current in each phase, and shall maintain current transformer secondaries in a closed-circuit condition at all times.

E. Feeder Ammeters: 2-1/2-inch minimum size with 90-degree or 120-degree scale. Meter and transfer device with an "off' position shall be located on overcurrent device door for indicated feeder circuits only. In lieu of transfer device, three meters may be provided, one for each phase.

F. Watt-Hour Meters: Flush or semiflush type, rated 5 amperes, 120 V, 3 phase, 3 wire, with 3 elements, 15-minute-indicating-demand register, and provision for testing and adding pulse initiation.

G. Recording Demand Meter: Useable as totalizing relay or indicating and recording maximum demand meter with 15-minute interval. Meter shall count and control a succession of pulses entering two channels. House in drawout, back-connected case arranged for semi-flush mounting.


.)


H. Relays: IEEE C37.90, "Relays and Relay Systems Associated with Electric Power Apparatus." Types, settings, and control sequences as indicated. Provide test blocks and plugs.

2.7 CONTROL POWER

A. General: Where electrically operated devices or ground fault relays requiring external power are indicated, provide 120-V control circuits supplied through secondary disconnect devices from control power transformer.

B. Electrically Interlocked Main and Tie Circuit Breakers: Provide two control power transformers in separate compartments with necessary interlocking relays. Connect the primary of each control power transformer at the line side of the associated main circuit breaker. Connect the 120-V secondaries through a relay or relays as a control bus to effect a fail-safe automatic transfer scheme.

C. Control Power Fuses: Include primary and secondary fuses for current-limiting and overload protection of transformer and fuses for protection of control circuits.

D. Control Wiring: Factory-installed, complete with bundling, lacing, and protection. Provide flexible conductors for No.8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges, and for conductors for interconnections between shipping units.

2.8 RATINGS IZI

A. Provide nominal system voltage, continuous main bus amperage, and short-circuitcurrent ratings as indicated.

B. Nominal System Voltage: 480/277 V, 60 Hz.

C. Nominal System Voltage: 208/120 V, 60 Hz.

D. Main Bus Continuous: 4000 amperes.

E. Main Bus Continuous: 3200 amperes.

F. Main Bus Continuous: 2000 amperes.

G. Main Bus Continuous: 1600 amperes.

2.9 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES IZI

A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items as required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

B. Portable Test Set: Arranged to permit testing of all functions of solid-state trip devices without removal from switchboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing switchboard meters and switchboard class relays.



c.

D.

E.

F.

2.10

A.

B.

Circuit-Breaker Removal Apparatus: Portable, floor-supported, roller-base, elevating carriage arranged for movement of breakers in and out of compartments for present and future breakers.

Circuit-Breaker Removal Apparatus: Overhead breaker lifting device, mounted at top front of switchboard and complete with hoist and lifting yokes matching each drawout breaker.

Spare Fuse Cabinet: Suitably identified, wall-mounted, lockable, compartmented, steel box or cabinet. Arrange for wall mounting.

Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for switchboard interior including instruments and instrument transformers.

IDENTIFICATION

General: Refer to Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." Identify units, devices, controls, and wiring with factory-applied labels and signs.

Compartment Nameplates: Engraved laminated plastic or metal nameplate for each compartment, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.

3PART - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install switchboards and accessory items in accordance with manufacturers' written installation instructions and the following specifications:

B. Anchor each switchboard assembly to two 4-inch-minimum channel-iron sills arranged in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Attach by tack welding or bolting. Level and grout sills flush with switchboard mounting surface.

C. Strength, Spacing, and Placement of Equipment Housekeeping Pads: Where a membrane-waterproofed floor or pressure slab is indicated under the switchboard, and where otherwise indicated, provide a concrete housekeeping pad. Provide 4-inch channel sills specified above in the pad. Fabricate pads as follows:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Coordinate-size of equipment bases with actual unit sizes provided. Fabricate base 4 inches larger in both directions than the overall dimensions of the supported unit. Form concrete pads with ASTM A36 steel channels; size and location as indicated. Miter and weld corners and provide cross bracing. Anchor or key to floor slab. Form concrete pads with framing lumber with form release compounds. Chamfer top edge and corners of pad. Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves to facilitate securing units.


( ~) \

( ... 5.

6.

7.


Place concrete and allow to cure before installation of units. Use Portland cement that conforms to ASTM C 150, 4000-psi compressive strength, and normal weight aggregate. Clean exposed steel form in accordance with SSPC Surface Preparation Specifications SP 2 or SP 3, and apply 2 coats of rust-preventive metal primer. Footings: For outdoor switchboard pads, provide footings as indicated.

D. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from switchboard units and components.

E. Operating Instructions: Frame and mount printed, basic operating instructions for switchboards, including control and key interlocking sequences, and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished wood or metal and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on the front of the switchboards.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."

8. Mimic Bus: Apply continuously integrated mimic bus to front of switchboard. Arrange in single-line diagram format, using symbols and lettered designations consistent with the approved final mimic bus diagram. Coordinate mimic bus segments with devices in switchboard sections to which applied. Produce a concise visual presentation of the principal switchboard components and connections.

1. Medium: Painted graphics in approved color contrasting with the equipment factory-finish background to represent the bus and components, complete with lettered designations.

2. Surface Preparation: As specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." 3. Execution: In accordance with sample approved under paragraph "Submissions."

3.3 GROUNDING

A. Connections: As indicated. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A and 4868.

8. Ground equipment to main electrical ground bus indicated. Provide minimum 5-ohm ground resistance at switchboard location.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten switchboard bus joint bolts and electrical connector and terminal bolts in accordance with manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not stated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 4868.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL IZI



A. General: Comply with applicable standards of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association (INETA) including Standard ATS, "Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems."

B. Manufacturer's Field Services: Arrange and pay for the services of a factory-authorized service representative to supervise the pretesting and adjustment of switchboard components for a total or 5 working days.

C. Independent Testing Organization: Arrange and pay for the services of an independent electrical testing organization to perform quality control electrical testing and calibration, visual and mechanical inspections, and tests of overcurrent protective devices switchboards.

D. Pretesting: Upon completing installation of the system, perform the following preparations for tests:

1. Make insulation resistance tests of switchboard buses, components, and connecting supply, feeder, and control circuits.

2. Make continuity tests of circuits. 3. Provide set of Contract Documents to test organization. Include full updating on

final system configuration and parameters where they supplement or differ from those indicated in original Contract Documents.

4. Provide manufacturer's instructions for installation and testing of switchboard to test organization.

E. Quality Control Testing Program: Conform to the following:

1. Program Objectives: To assure switchboard installation meets specified requirements, is operational within specified tolerances, provides appropriate protection for systems and equipment, and is suitable for energizing.

2. Procedures: Make field tests and inspections and prepare switchboard for satisfactory operation in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications.

3. Schedule tests and notify Architect at least one week in advance of test commencement.

4. Reports: Prepare written reports of test results and observations. Report defective materials and workmanship. Include complete records of adjustments and remedial efforts.

5. Labeling: Upon satisfactory completion of tests and related effort. Apply a label to tested components indicating test results, person responsible, and date.

6. Protective Device Ratings and Settings: Verify indicated ratings and settings and make the final system adjustments of OCPDs in accordance with Division 16 Section "Overcurrent Protection Devices."

F. Visual and Mechanical Inspections: Include the following inspections and related work:

1.

2.

Inspect for defects and physical damage, testing laboratory, labels, and nameplate compliance with up-to-date circuit connections. Verify that potential transformers, including their overcurrent protection and


\

current transformers, meet specified requirements.

Section16425-Page130f14 SWITCHBOARDS

3. Perform operational test and exercise of mechanical components and other operable devices in accordance with manufacturer's instruction manual.

4. Check switchboard anchorage, area clearances, and alignment and fit of components.

5. Check tightness of bolted electrical connections with calibrated torque wrench. Refer to manufacturer's instructions for proper torque values.

6. Clean switchboard interior and exterior using manufacturer's approved methods and materials.

7. Perform visual and mechanical inspection and related work for OCPDs as specified in Section "Overcurrent Protective Devices."

G. Electrical Tests: Include the following items performed in accordance with manufacturer's instruction:

1. Insulation resistance test of buses and portions of control wiring that disconnect from solid state devices through normal disconnecting features. Insulation resistance less than 100 megohms is not acceptable.

2. Ratio and polarity tests on current and voltage transformers. 3. Ground resistance test on system and equipment ground connections. 4. Calibrate ammeters and voltmeters at midscale. Use check instruments with

ocumented up-to-date calibration traceable to NIST standards. 5. Verify appropriate capacity, overcurrent protection, and operating voltage of

control power elements including control power transformer and control power wiring.

6. Calibrate watthour and demand meters to 0.5 percent, and verify meter multipliers. Use check instruments with documented up-to-date calibration traceable to NIST standards.

7. Check phasing of alternate supply sources to the same bus. 8. Test overcurrent protective devices as specified in Section "Overcurrent Protective

Devices."

H. Retesting: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest switchboards. Verify by the retests that switchboards meet specified requirements.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Upon completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of switchboards. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation within each section of switchboards throughout periods during which the switchboard is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION



A. Training: Arrange and pay for the services of factory-authorized service representatives to demonstrate switchboards and train Owner's maintenance personnel.

B. Training: Conduct a minimum of one-half day of training in operation and maintenance as specified under "Instructions to Owner Employees" in the Division 1 Section "Project Closeout." Include both classroom training and hands-on equipment operation and maintenance procedures.

C. Schedule training with at least seven days' advance notification.

3.9 COMMISSIONING

A. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 2 months after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of switchboard bus joints and connections. Open or remove metal doors, covers, inspection plates, and barriers to make joints and connections accessible to a portable scanner.

B. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform 2 additional follow-up infrared scans of the same joints and connections, one 4 months after Substantial Completion and one 11 months after Substantial Completion.

C. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration.

D. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report identifying all connections checked and describing results of scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.



SECTION 16452 - GROUNDING

lPART - GENERAL


Section 16452 - Page 1 of 8 GROUNDING




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes solid grounding of electrical systems and equipment. It includes basic requirements for grounding for protection of life, equipment, circuits, and systems. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented in other sections of these Specifications.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data for ground rods, connectors and connection materials, and grounding fittings.

C. Field-testing organization certificate, signed by the Contractor, certifying that the organization performing field tests complies with the requirements specified in Quality Assurance below.

D. Report of field tests and observations certified by the testing organization.


A. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. The terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be defined as they are in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.


B. Field-Testing Organization Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, the independent testing organization must demonstrate, based on evaluation of organization-submitted criteria conforming to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to conduct satisfactorily the testing indicated.


Section 16452 - Page 2 of8 GROUNDING

e. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code" (NEC).

D. UL Standard: Comply with UL 467, "Grounding and Bonding Equipment."

2PART - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Anixter Bros., Inc. 2. Bashlin Industries, Inc. 3. Buckingham Mfg. Co. 4. A.B. Chance Co. 5. Dossert Corp. 6. Engineered Products Co. 7. Erico Products, Inc. 8. Galvan Industries, Inc. 9. GB Electrical, Inc. 10. General Machine Products Co., Inc. 11. Hastings Fiber Glass Products, Inc. 12. Ideal Industries, Inc. 13. Kearney-National. 14. McGill Mfg. 15. O-ZjGedney Co. 16. Raco, Inc. 17. Thomas & Betts Corp. 18. W.H. Salisbury & Co. 19. Utilco Co.

2.2 GROUNDING AND BONDING PRODUCTS

A. Products: Of types indicated and of sizes and ratings to comply with NEe. Where types, sizes, ratings, and quantities indicated are in excess of NEC requirements, the more stringent requirements and the greater size, rating, and quantity indications govern.

B. Conductor Materials: Copper.

1. Where aluminum conductors are used for power wiring, use aluminum for grounding system conductors (except provide copper for those insulated and uninsulated conductors in direct contact with earth, concrete, or crushed stone).


(,. . .. \ " '

2.3 WIRE AND CABLE CONDUCTORS


A. General: Comply with Division 16 Section "Wires and Cables." Conform to NEC Table B, except as otherwise indicated, for conductor properties, including stranding.

B. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Green insulated.

C. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Stranded cable.

D. Bare Copper Conductors: Conform to the following:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B-3. 2. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B-B. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B-33.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS CONDUCTORS

A. Ground Bus: Bare annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section.

B. Braided Bonding Jumpers: Copper tape, braided No. 30 gage bare copper wire, terminated with copper ferrules.

C. Bonding Strap Conductor/Connectors: Soft copper, 0.05 inch thick and 2 inches wide, except as indicated.

2.5 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS

A. General: Listed and labeled as grounding connectors for the materials used.

B. Pressure Connectors: High-conductivity-plated units.

C. Bolted Clamps: Heavy-duty units listed for the application.

D. Exothermic Welded Connections: Provided in kit form and selected for the specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items to be connected.

E. Aluminum-To-Copper Connections: Bimetallic type, conforming to UL 96, "Lighting Protection Components," or UL 467.

2.6 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel with high-strength steel core and electrolytic-grade copper outer sheath, molten welded to core.

1. Size: 3/4 inch by 10 feet.

B. Plate Electrodes: Copper plates, minimum 0.10 inch thick, size as indicated.


Section 16452 - Page 4 ofS GROUNDING

3PART - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Equipment Grounding Conductor Application: Comply with NEC Article 250 for sizes and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, except where larger sizes or more conductors are indicated.

1. Use raceway as the equipment ground conductor where feasible and permitted by NEC for the following:

a. Feeders and branch circuits except as otherwise indicated. b. Lighting circuits. c. Receptacle circuits. d. Single-phase motor or appliance circuits. e. Three-phase motor or appliance branch circuits.

2. Install separate insulated equipment grounding conductors with circuit conductors for the following in addition to those locations where required by Code:

a. Feeders and branch circuits. b. Lighting circuits. c. Receptacle Circuits. d. Single-phase motor or appliance circuits. e. Three-phase motor or appliance branch circuits.

3. Busway Circuits: Install separate insulated equipment ground conductor from the ground bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to the equipment ground bar terminal on the busway.

4. Computer Panel Circuits: Install separate insulated equipment ground wire in branch circuits from computer area power panels.

5. X-ray Equipment Circuits: Install separate insulated equipment ground conductor in circuits supplying X-ray equipment.

6. Nonmetallic Raceways: Install an insulated equipment ground conductor in nonmetallic raceways unless they are designated for telephone or data cables.

7. Air Duct Equipment Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120-V and above including air cleaners and heaters. Bond the conductor to each such unit and to the air duct.

8. Water Heater, Heat Tracing, and Anti-Frost Heater Circuits: Install separate insulated equipment ground conductor to each electric water heater, heat tracing, and surface anti-frost heating cable. Bond this conductor to heater units, piping, and connected equipment and components.

B. Underground Conductors: Bare, tinned, stranded copper except as otherwise indicted.

C. Underground Conductors: Bare, stranded copper except as otherwise indicated.



D. Signal and Communications: For telephone, alarm, and communication systems, provide a #4 AWG minimum green insulated copper conductor in raceway from the grounding electrode system to each terminal cabinet or central equipment location.

E. Separately derived systems required by NEC to be grounded shall be grounded in accordance with NEC paragraph 250-26.

F. Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Ground pole to a grounding electrode as indicated in addition to separate equipment grounding conductor run with supply branch circuit.

G. Connections to Lightning Protection System: Bond grounding conductors or grounding conductor conduits to lightning protection down conductors or grounding conductors in compliance with NFPA 78 "Lightning Protection Code."

H. Common Ground Bonding With Lightning Protection System: Bond electric power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electric service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system ground conductor and installed in conduit.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Ground electrical systems and equipment in accordance with NEC requirements except where the Drawings or Specifications exceed NEC requirements.

B. Electrical Room Ground Bus: Size, location, and arrangement as indicated. Space 1 inch from wall and support from wall 6 inches above finished floor, except as otherwise indicated.

C. Ground Rods: Locate a minimum of one-rod length from each other and at least the same distance from any other grounding electrode. Interconnect ground rods with bare conductors buried at least 24 inches below grade. Connect bare-cable ground conductors to ground rods by means of exothermic welds except as otherwise indicated. Make these connections without damaging the copper coating or exposing the steel. Use 3/4-inch by 10-ft. ground rods except as otherwise indicated. Drive rods until tops are 6 inches below finished floor or final grade except as otherwise indicated.

D. Metallic Water Service Pipe: Provide insulated copper ground conductors, sized as indicated, in conduit from the building main service equipment, or the ground bus, to main metallic water service entrances to the building. Connect ground conductors to the main metallic water service pipes by means of ground clamps. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect the ground conductor to the street side of the fitting. Do not install a grounding jumper around dielectric fittings. Bond the ground conductor conduit to the conductor at each end.

E. Braided-Type Bonding Jumpers: Install to connect ground clamps on water meter piping to bypass water meters electrically. Use elsewhere for flexible bonding and grounding connections.



F. Route grounding conductors along the shortest and straightest paths possible without obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage, except as indicated.

G. Bond interior metal piping systems and metal air ducts to equipment ground conductors of pumps, fans, electric heaters, and air cleaners serving individual systems.

H. Test Wells: Locate as indicated, and fabricate in accordance with details indicated.

I. UFER Ground: Fabricate with 20 feet of conductor laid lengthwise in excavation for foundation or footings. Install so conductor is within 2 inches of the bottom of the concrete. Where base of foundation is less than 20 feet in length, coil excess conductor at base of foundation. Bond conductor to reinforcing steel at four locations, minimum. Extend conductor below grade and connect to building grounding grid or grounding electrode.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. General: Make connections in such a manner as to minimize possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.

1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to assure high conductivity and make contact points closer in order of galvanic series.

2. Make connections with clean bare metal at points of contact. 3. Aluminum to steel connections shall be with stainless steel separators and

mechanical clamps. 4. Aluminum to galvanized steel connections shall be with tin-plated copper jumpers

and mechanical clamps. 5. Coat and seal connections involving dissimilar metals with inert material such as

red lead paint to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.

B. Exothermic Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for underground connections except those at test wells. Install at connections to ground rods and plate electrodes. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.

C. Terminate insulated equipment grounding conductors for feeders and branch circuits with pressure-type grounding lugs. Where metallic raceways terminate at metallic housings without mechanical and electrical connection to the housing, terminate each conduit with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to the ground bus in the housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at both entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors.

D. Tighten grounding and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values for connectors and bolts. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connections to comply with torque tightening values specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.


)


E. Connections at Test Wells: Use compression-type connectors on conductors and make bolted- and clamped-type connections between conductors and ground rods.

F. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide the correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by the manufacturer of the connectors. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on the ground conductor.

G. Moisture Protection: Where insulated ground conductors are connected to ground rods or ground buses, insulate the entire area of the connection and seal against moisture penetration of the insulation and cable.

3.4 OVERHEAD LINE GROUNDING

A. General: Comply with ANSI C2, "National Electrical Safety Code" for "Single-Grounded Systems," using two electrodes in parallel if a single electrode resistance to ground exceeds 25 ohms.

B. Ground Rod Connections: Use exothermic welds for underground connections and connections to rods.

C. Lightning Arresters: Separate arrester grounds from other ground conductors.

D. Secondary Neutral and Tank of Transformer: Interconnect and connect to ground.

E. Grounding Conductor Protection: Protect grounding conductors running on the surface of wood poles with molding of a type manufactured for this purpose .. Extend from grade level up to and through communications and transformer spaces.

3.5 UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM GROUNDING

A. Manholes and Handholes: Install a 3/4-inch by 10-ft. driven ground rod close to the wall and set the rod depth such that 4 inches will extend above the finished floor. Where necessary, install ground rod before the manhole is placed and provide a No. 1/0 bare tinned-copper conductor from the ground rod into the manhole through a waterproof sleeve in the manhole wall. Protect ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches above to 6 inches below the concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof nonshrink grout ..

B. Connections at Manholes: Connect exposed metal parts, such as inserts, cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole to the ground rod or ground conductor. Make connections with minimum No.4 AWG stranded harddrawn copper wire. Train conductors plumb or level around corners and fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable shields by means of tinned terminals soldered to the armor or shield, or as recommended by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits.


Section 16452 - Page 8 of8 GROUNDING

C. Grounding System: Ground non-current-carrying metallic items associated with manholes, substations, and pad-mounted equipment by connecting them to bare underground cable and grounding electrodes arranged as indicated.


A. Independent Testing Organization: Arrange and pay for the services of a qualified independent electrical testing organization to perform tests described below.

B. Tests: Subject the completed grounding system to a megger test at each location where a maximum ground resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure ground terminal, and at ground test wells. Measure ground resistance without the soil being moistened by any means other than natural precipitation or natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. Perform tests by the 2-point method in accordance with Section 9.03 of IEEE 81, "Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance and Earth Surface Potentials of a Grounding System."

C. Ground/resistance maximum values shall be as follows:

1. Equipment rated 500 kVA and less: 10 Ohms 2. Equipment rated 500 kVA to 1000 kVA: 5 Ohms 3. Equipment rated over 1000 kVA: 3 Ohms 4. Unfenced substations and pad-mounted equipment: 5 Ohms 5. Manhole grounds: 10 Ohms

D. Deficiencies: Where ground resistances exceed specified values, and if directed, modify the grounding system to reduce resistance values. Where measures are directed that exceed those indicated the provisions of the Contract, covering changes will apply.

E. Report: Prepare test reports, certified by the testing organization, of the ground resistance at each test location. Include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.

3.7 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades except as otherwise indicated. Where sod has been removed, replace it as soon as possible after backfilling is completed. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, -and other Work to their original condition. Include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, or mulching. Perform such Work in accordance with Division 2 Section "Landscape Work." Maintain disturbed surfaces. Restore vegetation in accordance with Section "Landscape Work" Restore disturbed paving as indicated.



SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS

lPART - GENERAL


Section 16470 - Page 1 of9 PANELBOARDS


8. Requirements of the following Division 16 Sections apply to this Section:


1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes lighting and power panelboards and associated auxiliary equipment rated 600 V or less.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Load Center: A panelboard with thermal magnetic circuit-breaker branches, primarily of the plug-in type, designed for residential and light commercial projects, operating at 240 V and below, available in both single and 3-phase versions, and equipped with combination flush/surface mounting trim.

8. Overcurrent Protective Device (OCPD): A device operative on excessive current that causes and maintains the interruption of power in the circuit it protects.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data for each type panelboard, accessory item, and component specified.

C. Shop drawings from manufacturers of panelboards including dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations. Show tabulations of installed devices, major features, and voltage rating. Include the following:

1. Enclosure type with details for types other than NEMA Type 1. 2. Bus configuration and current ratings. 3. Short-circuit current rating of panel board. 4. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual protective

devices and auxiliary components. Spare Fuse Cabinets: Show materials, dimensions, and features including storage provisions for fuse cartons.



D. Wiring diagrams detailing schematic diagram including control wiring, and differentiating between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

E. Qualification data for field-testing organization certificates, signed by the Contractor, certifying that the organization complies with the requirements specified in Quality Assurance below. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, and names of Architect and Owner plus basic organization qualifications data.

F. Report of field tests and observations certified by the testing organization.

G. Panel schedules for installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing.

H. Maintenance data for panelboard components, for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1 and in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Requirements." Include instructions for testing circuit breakers.


A. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.

1. The terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be defined as they are in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.

Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

8. Field-Testing Organization Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, the independent testing organization must demonstrate, based on evaluation of organization-submitted criteria conforming to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to conduct satisfactorily the testing indicated.

C. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code."

D. NEMA Standard: Comply with NEMA PB1, "Panelboards."

E. UL Standards: Comply with UL 61, "Panelboards," and UL 50, "Cabinets and Boxes."

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Keys: Furnish six spares of each type for panelboard cabinet locks.

8. Touch-up Paint for surface-mounted panelboards: One half-pint container.

2PART - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS





1. ABB Power Distribution, Inc. 2. American Circuit Breaker Corp. 3. Asco Electrical Products Co., Inc. 4. Challenger Electrical Equipment Corp. S. Crouse-Hinds Distribution Equipment. 6. Eaton Corp. 7. General Electric Co. 8. GTE Sylvania Lighting. 9. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 10. Square D Co. 11. Wadsworth Electric Mfg. Co., Inc. 12. Westinghouse Electric Corp.

2.2 PANELBOARDS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Overcurrent Protective Devices (OCPDs): Provide type, rating, and features as indicated. Comply with Division 16 Section "Overcurrent Protective Devices," with OCPDs adapted to panelboard installation. Tandem circuit breakers shall not be used. Multipole breakers shall have common trip.

B. Enclosures: Cabinets, flush or surface mounted as indicted. NEMA Type 1 enclosure, except where the following enclosure requirements are indicated.

1. NEMA 3R: Raintight. 2. NEMA 3S: Raintight and dust tight. 3. NEMA 4X: Corrosion-resistant fiberglass enclosure, watertight, dust tight, and

resistant to oil and coolant seepage. 4. NEMA 12: Dust tight, dripproof, and resistant to oil and coolant seepage.

C. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps except as indicated. Front for surfacemounted panels shall be same dimensions as box. Fronts for flush panels shall overlap box except as otherwise specified.

D. Directory Frame: Metal, mounted inside each panel door.

E. Bus: Hard drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity.

F. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type.

G. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment ground conductors. Bonded to box.



H. Service Equipment Approval: Listed for use as service equipment for panelboards having main service disconnect.

I. Provision for Future Devices: Equip with mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances, for the OCPD ampere ratings indicated for future installation of devices.

J. Special Features: Provide the following features for panelboards as indicated.

1. Isolated Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for branch-circuit equipment ground conductors; insulated from box.

2. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box with standard door within hinged trim cover.

3. Split Bus: Vertical bus of indicated panels divided into two vertical sections with connections as indicated.

4. Skirt For Surface-Mounted Panels: Same gage and finish as panel front with flanges for attachment to panel, wall, and floor. Contactors in Mains: Mechanically held, with current rating, poles, and connections as indicated. Conform to Division 16 Section "Motor Controller," except omit overload protection.

6. Control Power Source: Control power transformer of capacity indicated, for contactor shunt trip or other devices. Mount in cabinet of panel indicated. Protect primary with current-limiting OCPD as indicated. Provide fused protection of control circuits.

7. Extra Gutter Space: Dimensions and arrangement as indicated. 8. Gutter Barrier: Arranged to isolate section of gutter as indicated. 9. Auxiliary Gutter: Conform to UL 870, "Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters and Associated

Fittings." 10. Column-Type Panelboard Configuration: Narrow cabinet extended as wirewayto

overhead junction box equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses. 11. Subfeed: OCPD or lug provision as indicated.

K. Feed-Through Lugs: Sized to accommodate feeders indicated.

L. Surge Arresters: IEEE C62.11, "Standards for Metal-Oxide Surge Arresters for AC Power Circuits," or IEEE C62.1, "Surge Arresters for Alternating Current Power Circuits."

1. Description: Coordinate impulse sparkover voltage with system circuit voltage and provide factory mounting with UL-recognized mounting device.

2.3 LOAD CENTERS

A. Provide load-center-type panelboards only where specifically indicated.

1. General: Conform to above article "Panelboards, General Requirements" except as follows:

B. OCPDs: Plug-in full module (nominall-inch width) circuit breaker.



C. Circuit Breakers for Switching Lights at Panelboards: Indicated type SWD.

D. Circuit Breakers for Equipment Marked HCAR Type: Indicated HCAR type.

E. Interiors: Provide physical means to prevent installation of more OCPDs than the quantity for which the enclosure was listed.

F. Main, Neutral, and Ground Lugs and Buses: Have mechanical connectors for conductors.

2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. Branch OCPDs: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

B. Double-Width Panels: Where more than 42 poles are indicated or where otherwise indicated, provide two panelboards under single front.

C. Doors: In panel front, with concealed hinges. Secure with flush catch and tumbler lock, all keyed alike.

2.5 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

A. Doors: In panel front, omit single panelboard door in cabinet front for fusible switch panelboards except as indicated. Secure with vault-type with tumbler lock, all keyed alike.

B. Branch-Circuit Breakers: Where OCPDs are indicated to be circuit breakers, use bolt-on breakers except circuit breakers 225-ampere frame size and greater may be plug-in type where individual positive locking device requires mechanical release for removal.

C. Motor Starter Branches: Conform to Division 16 Section "Motor Controllers" and provide units equipped for panelboard mounting. Include the following accessories and pilot devices as indicated:

1. Individual control power transformers. 2. Fuses for control power transformers. 3. Pilot lights. 4. Extra interlock contacts. 5. Pushbuttons. 6. Selector switches.

D. Motor Starter Disconnects: Include overcurrent protection as indicated. Mount integral with or, in same panelboard, adjacent to motor starter. Mechanically interlock starter door with disconnect device. Provide auxiliary contacts on disconnect to deenergize control connections to starter.

2.6 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES IZl

A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items as required for overcurrent



protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

B. Portable Test Set: Arranged to permit testing of functions of solid-state trip devices without removal from panelboard.

C. Spare Fuse Cabinet: Identified, compartmented, lockable steel box or cabinet with compartments suitable for surface mounting on wall.

D. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for panelboards interior including OCPDs and other components.

2.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. General: Refer to Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification" for labeling materials.

B. Panelboard Nameplates: Engraved laminated plastic or metal nameplate for each panelboard mounted with epoxy or industrial cement or industrial adhesive.

3PART - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install panelboards and accessory items in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1, "General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less" and manufacturers' written installation instructions.

B. Ground Fault Protection: Install panelboard ground fault circuit interrupter devices in accordance with installation guidelines of NEMA 289, "Application Guide for Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters."

C. Mounting Heights: Top of trim 6'-2" above finished floor, except as indicated.

D. Mounting: Plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount flush panels uniformly flush with wall finish.

E. Circuit Directory: Typed and reflective of final circuit changes required to balance panel loads. Obtain approval before installing.

F. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

G. Provision for Future Circuits at Flush Panelboards: Stub four l-inch empty conduits from panel into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in future. Stub four l-inch empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab other than slabs on grade.

H. Auxiliary Gutter: Install where a panel is tapped to a riser at an intermediate location.

I. Wiring in Panel Gutters: Train conductors neatly in groups, bundle, and wrap with wire ties after completion of load balancing.


( 3.2 IDENTIFICATION

Section 16470· Page 7 of9 PANELBOARDS

A. Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning signs in accordance with Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."

3.3 GROUNDING

A. Connections: Make equipment grounding connections for panelboards as indicated.

B. Provide ground continuity to main electrical ground bus indicated.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL l'?J

A. Independent Testing Organization: Arrange and pay for the services of an independent electrical testing organization in to perform tests on low-voltage power panelboards and accessories.

B. Pretesting: Upon completing installation of the system, perform the following preparations for independent tests:

1. Make insulation resistance tests of panelboard buses, components, and connecting supply, feeder, and control circuits.

2. Make continuity tests of circuits. 3. Provide set of Contract Documents to test organization. Include full updating on

final system configuration and parameters where they supplement or differ from those indicated in original Contract Documents.

C. Quality Control Program: Conform to the following:

1. Procedures: Make field tests and inspections and prepare panelboard for satisfactory operation in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications.

2. Schedule tests with at least one week in advance notification. 3. Reports by Testing Organization: Report written reports of tests and observations.

Report defective materials and workmanship and unsatisfactory test results. Include records of repairs and adjustments made.

4. Labeling: Upon satisfactory completion of tests and related effort, apply a label to tested components indicating results of tests and inspections, responsible organization and person, and date.

5. Protective Device Ratings and Settings: Verify indicated ratings and settings to be



appropriate for final system configuration and parameters. Where discrepancies are found, recommend final protective device ratings and settings. Use accepted ratings or settings to make the final system adjustments.

D. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Include the following inspections and related work:

1. Inspect for defects and physical damage, labeling, and nameplate compliance with requirements of up-to-date drawings and panelboard schedules.

2. Exercise and perform of operational tests of all mechanical components and other operable devices in accordance with manufacturer's instruction manual.

3. Check panelboard mounting, area clearances, and alignment and fit of components. 4. Check tightness of bolted electrical connections with calibrated torque wrench.

Refer to manufacturer's instructions for proper torque values. 5. Perform visual and mechanical inspection and related work for overcurrent

protective devices as specified in Division 16 Section "Overcurrent Protective Devices."

E. Electrical tests: Include the following items performed in accordance with manufacturer's instruction:

1. Insulation resistance test of buses and portions of control wiring that disconnected from solid-state devices. Insulation resistance less than 100 megohms is not acceptable.

2. Ground resistance test on system and equipment ground connections. 3. Test main and subfeed overcurrent protective devices in accordance with Section

"Overcurrent Protective Devices."

F. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and provide retesting of panelboards by testing organization. Verify by the system tests that the total assembly meets specified requirements.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Upon completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish.

3.7 COMMISSIONING

A. Balancing Loads: After Substantial Completion, but not more than two months after Final Acceptance,. conduct load-balancing measurements and circuit changes as follows:

1. Perform measurements during period of normal working load as advised by the Owner.

2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside the normal occupancy/working schedule of the facility. Make special arrangements with Owner to avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as FAX machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.

3. Recheck loads after circuit changes during normal load period. Record all load



readings before and after changes and submit test records. 4. Tolerance: Difference between phase loads exceeding 20 percent at anyone

panelboard is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as required to meet this minimum requirement.

B. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than two months after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove fronts to make joints and connections accessible to a portable scanner.

C. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform one additional follow-up infrared scan of each panelboard 11 months after the date of Substantial Completion.

D. Instrument: Use an approved infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device used.

E. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report identifying panelboards checked and describing results of scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.



/

SECTION 16475 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

lPART - GENERAL


Section 16475 - Page 1 of12 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES


B. Requirements of the following Division 16 sections apply to this Section:


1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes overcurrent protective devices (OCPDs) rated 600 V and below and switching devices commonly used with them.

B. Panelboards, Switchboards, and Motor Control Centers: Application, installation, and other related requirements for overcurrent protective device installations in distribution equipment are specified in other Division 16 sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Overcurrent Protective Device (OCPD): A device operative on excessive current that causes and maintains the interruption of power in the circuit it protects.

B. Ampere-Squared-Seconds: An expression of available thermal energy resulting from current flow. With regard to current-limiting fuses and circuit breakers, the amperesquared-seconds during fault current interruption represents the energy allowed to flow before the fuse or breaker interrupts the fault current within its current limiting range.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data for fuses, fusible switches, circuit breakers, and OCPD accessories specified in this Section, induding descriptive data and time-current curves for all protective devices and let-through current curves for those with current limiting characteristics. Include coordination charts and tables and related data.

C. Coordination study performed by a registered professional engineer in accordance with ANSI/IEEE Standard 242-1986, "Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems." Where OCPD manufacturers other than those designated in schedules of overcurrent protective devices are proposed for use, submit a full coordination study showing graphically that the substitute OCPDs


Section 16475 - Page 2 of 12 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

coordinate selectively with both upstream and downstream components. Include single line diagram, coordinated time-current characteristics, device performance curves, and fault current calculations adequate to demonstrate satisfactory component protection and selective coordination of protective devices. Study shall be commissioned and paid for by the Contractor.

D. Coordination study performed by a registered professional engineer in accordance with ANSI/IEEE Standard 242-1986, "Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems." Show graphically how overcurrent protective devices coordinate selectively with both upstream and downstream components. Include single line diagram, coordinated time-current characteristics, device performance curves, and fault current calculations adequate to demonstrate satisfactory component protection and selective coordination of protective devices.



B. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.

1.

2.

The terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be defined as they are in the National Electrical Code, Article 100. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain similar OCPDs from a single manufacturer.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Maintenance Stock, Fuses: For types and ratings required, furnish spare fuses, amounting to one unit for every 5 installed units, but not less than one set of 3 of each kind.

2PART - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Cartridge Fuses:


/ '/

a. Brush Fuses Inc. b. Bussmann Div., Cooper Industries, Inc. c. Eagle Electric Mfg. Co., Inc. d. Ferraz Corp. e. General Electric Co. f. Gould Inc. g. Littelfuse Inc.

2. Fusible Switches:

a. Allen-Bradley Co. b. Challenger Electrical Equipment Corp. c. Crouse-Hinds Distribution Equipment. d. Eaton Corp. e. General Electric Co. f. General Switch Corp. g. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. h. Square DCa. L Wadsworth Electric Mfg. Co., Inc. j. Westinghouse Electric Co.

3. Fused Power Circuit Devices:

a. b. c. d. e.

Challenger Electrical Equipment Corp. General Electric Co. Kinney Electrical Mfg. Co. Pringle Electrical Mfg. Co. Square DCa.

4. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers:

a. American Circuit Breaker Corp. b. ABB Power Distribution, Inc. c. Challenger Electrical Equipment Corp. d. Crouse-Hinds Distribution Equipment. e. Eaton Corp. f. General Electric Co. g. General Switch Corp. h. Heinemann Electric Co. L Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. j. Square DCa. k Wadsworth Electric Mfg. Co., Inc. 1. Westinghouse Electric Corp.


5. Combination Circuit Breaker and Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters:

a. American Circuit Breaker Corp. b. Challenger Electrical Equipment Corp. c. Crouse-Hinds Distribution Equipment.



d. General Electric Co. e. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. f. Square D Co. g. Westinghouse Electric Corp.

6. Molded-Case Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers:

a. General Electric Co. b. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. c. Square D Co. d. Westinghouse Electric Corp.

7. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers With Solid-State Trip Devices:


8. Integrally Fused Molded-Case Circuit Breakers:

a. General Electric Co. b. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. c. Westinghouse Electric Corp.

9. Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers:


2.2 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES (OCPDs), GENERAL

A. General: Provide OCPDs in indicated types, as integral components of panel boards and also as individually enclosed and mounted single units.

B. General: Provide OCPDs in indicated types, as integral components of panel boards, switchboards, and motor control centers; and also as individually enclosed and mounted single units.

C. Enclosures: NEMA 250 "Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum)."

2.3 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. General: NEMA Standard FU1, "Low-Voltage Cartridge Fuses." Unless indicated otherwise, provide nonrenewable cartridge fuses of indicated types, classes, and current ratings that have voltage ratings consistent with the circuits on which used.


(


B. Class J Fuses: UL 198C, "High-Interrupting Capacity Fuses, Current-Limiting Type."

C. Class L Fuses: UL 198C, "High-Interrupting Capacity Fuses, Current-Limiting Type."

D. Class RKl and RK5 Dual Element Time-Delay Fuses: UL 198E, "Class R Fuses."

E. Class RKl Fast-Acting Fuses: UL 198E, "Class R Fuses."

2.4 FUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. General: UL 98 "Enclosed and Dead Front Switches" and NEMA KS 1 "Enclosed Switches," quick-make, quick-break heavy-duty units.

B. Rating: Load-breaking capacity in excess of the normal horsepower rating for the switch.

C. Withstand Capability: In excess of the let-through current permitted by its fuse when subject to faults up to 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes.

D. Operation: By means of external handle.

E. Interlock: Prevents access to switch interior except when in "off' position.

F. Fuse Clips: Rejection type.

G. Padlocking Provisions: For 2 padlocks, whether open or closed.

H. Enclosure for Switchboard or Panelboard Mounting: Suitable for panel mounting where indicated.

I. Enclosure for Switchboard Mounting: Provide individual mounting where indicated.

J. Enclosure for Independent Mounting: NEMA Type 1 enclosure except as otherwise indicated or required to suit environment where located.

2.5 FUSED POWER CIRCUIT DEVICES

A. General: UL 977, "Fused Power Circuit Devices," with either bolted-pressure-type or high-pressure contact-type switch.

B. Operation: Manually opened and closed.

C. Operation: Manually closed, electrically tripped.

D. Operation: Electrically closed and tripped.

E. Operation: As indicated.

F. Ground Fault Protection: Integral, self-powered type with mechanical ground fault indicator, test function, adjustable pick-up current and delay time with inverse and



constant time characteristics, internal memory arranged to integrate intermittent arcing ground faults, and ground fault current sensor located as indicated.

G. Open Fuse Trip Device: Arranged to trip switch open if a phase fuse opens.

H. Enclosure for Switchboard Mounting: Suitable for individual mounting.

I. Enclosure for Independent Mounting: NEMA Type 1 enclosure, except as indicated or except as required to suit environment where located.

J. Minimum Fault Current Rating: 100,000 rms symmetrical amperes.

K. Minimum Fault Current Rating: 150,000 rms symmetrical amperes.

L. Minimum Fault Current Rating: 200,000 rms symmetrical amperes.

M. Minimum Fault Current Rating: As indicated.

2.6 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. General: UL 489, "Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures," and NEMA AB 1, "Molded Case Circuit Breakers."

B. Construction: Bolt-in type, except breakers 225-ampere frame size and larger may be plug-in type ifheld in place by positive locking device requiring mechanical release for removal.

C. Construction: Bolt-in type, except breakers in load-center-type panelboards and breakers 225-ampere frame size and larger may be plug-in type if held in place by positive locking device requiring mechanical release for removal.

D. Characteristics: Indicated frame size, trip rating, number of poles, and a short-circuit interrupting capacity rating of 10,000 amperes symmetrical, unless a greater rating is indicated.

E. Tripping Device: Quick-make, quick-break toggle mechanism with inverse-time delay and instantaneous overcurrent trip protection for each pole.

F. Adjustable Instantaneous Trip Devices: Factory adjusted to low-trip-setting current values.

G. Enclosure for Switchboard or Panelboard Mounting: Suitable for panel mounting in switchboard or panelboards where indicated.

H. Enclosure for Switchboard or Motor Control Center Mounting: Provide individual mounting where indicated.

I. Enclosure for Independent Mounting: NEMA Type 1 enclosure, except as otherwise indicated or required to suit environment where located.


- >'

i \ .


J. Combination Circuit Breakers and Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters: UL 943 "Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters," arranged for sensing and tripping for ground fault current in addition to overcurrent and short-circuit current. Provide features as follows:

1. Match features and module size of panelboard breakers and provide clear identification of ground fault trip function.

2. Trip Setting for Ground Fault: 4 to 6 milliamperes, listed and labeled as a class A, type 1 device.

3. Trip Setting for Ground Fault: 30 milliamperes. 4. Trip setting for ground fault as indicated.

K. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Arranged to limit let-through ampere-squaredseconds during fault conditions to a value less than the ampere-squared-seconds of onehalf-cycle wave of the prospective symmetrical fault current. The circuit breaker shall use no fusible devices in its operation. The current-limiting characteristic shall be in addition to normal time-delay and instantaneous-trip characteristics and other features as indicated.

L. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Arranged to limit let-through ampere-squaredseconds during fault conditions to a value less than the ampere-squared-seconds of onehalf-cycle wave of the prospective symmetrical fault current. The current-limiting characteristic shall be achieved through the use of replaceable current-limiting fuses internally mounted within the circuit-breaker case. The opening of anyone fuse shall trip all poles of the circuit breaker. For each trip rating the time-current characteristic of the fuses shall be coordinated with that ofthe normal inverse-time and instantaneoustrip devices of the circuit breaker so current-limiting fuse melting does not occur for faults within the interrupting rating of the basic breaker.

M. Circuit Breakers With Solid-State Trip Devices: Provide indicated circuit breakers with solid-state trip devices having the following features:

1. Ambient Compensation: Trip device insensitive to temperature changes between minus 20 deg C and plus 55 deg C.

2. Adjustability: Breaker ratings and trip settings shall be changeable by operation of controls on front panel of breaker, by change of plug-in element without removing breaker from mounting, or by a combination of the two methods.

3. Ground-Fault Tripping: Adjustable for pick-up and time-delay values. Provide for indicated units.

2.7 INSULATED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. General: UL 489, "Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures," and NEMAAB 1, "Molded-Case Circuit Breakers."

B. Ratings: Continuous-current, interrupting, and short-time-current ratings, and voltage and frequency ratings as indicated.

c. Operating Mechanism: Mechanically and electrically trip-free, stored-energy operating



mechanism with the following features:

1. Moving Contacts Closing Speed: Independent of both control and operator. 2. Stored-Energy Mechanism: Manually charged. 3. Stored-Energy Mechanism: Electrically charged, with provision for optional

manual charging. 4. Operation Counter: Include except as otherwise indicated.

D. Circuit-Breaker Trip Devices: Solid-state overcurrent trip device system that includes one integrally mounted current transformer or sensor per phase, a release mechanism, and the following features:

1. Functions: Long-time-delay, short-time-delay, and instantaneous-trip functions, which are independent of each other in both action and adjustment.

2. Temperature compensation to assure accuracy and calibration stability from minus 20 deg C to plus 55 deg C.

3. Field-adjustable, time-current characteristics. 4. Current Adjustability: Effected by operating controls on front panel or by

changing plug-in elements or current transformers or sensors. 5. Three bands for long-time- and short-time-delay functions marked "minimum,"

"intermediate," and "maximum." 6. Five pickup points, minimum, for long-time- and short-time-trip functions. 7. Six pickup points, minimum, for instantaneous-trip functions. 8. Ground fault protection with at least three short-time-delay settings and three

trip-time-delay bands. Adjustable current pickup. 9. Trip Indication: Labeled lights or mechanical indicators on trip device shall

indicate type of fault causing breaker trip. If lights are used, integral power source shall maintain indication for 60 hours, minimum.

E. Auxiliary Contacts for Remote Indication: Where remote indication of breaker position is indicated, provide a spare auxiliary switch in addition to other auxiliary switches required for normal breaker operation. The spare auxiliary switch shall consist of two Type "a" and two Type "b" stages (contacts), wired to a terminal block in the breaker housing.

F. Drawout Features: Circuit-breaker mounting assembly equipped with a racking mechanism that properly positions the power circuit breaker and holds it rigidly in connected, test, and fully disconnected positions and includes the following features:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Interlock arrangement, preventing movement of the circuit breaker to or from the connected position when it is in the closed position and closure of the circuit breaker unless it is in the connected, test, or disconnected position. Construction, permitting racking an open circuit breaker to or from the connected, test, and disconnected positions with the associated compartment door closed or equivalent dead-front barrier protection, and manual withdrawal to a position for removal from the structure with the door open. Primary disconnecting devices disengaged and secondary disconnecting devices engaged when breaker is in test position. Primary and secondary devices disengaged when circuit breaker is in the


(

disconnected position.


5. Ground contact engaged when the circuit-breaker element is in the connected and test positions.

G. Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories: Include the following:

1. Padlocking Provisions: For installing at least three padlocks on each breaker to secure its enclosure and prevent movement of the drawout mechanism.

2. Operating Handle: Provide one for each manually operated breaker. 3. Electric Close Button: Provide one for each electrically operated breaker. 4. Indicating Lights: Contacts for "Breaker Open" and "Breaker Closed," for main and

bus tie circuit breakers, and for other indicated breakers.

2.8 OCPD ACCESSORIES

A. Key Interlocks: Arrange interlocking so keys are held captive at devices indicated. Where future key interlocking provisions are indicated, provide necessary mountings and hardware as required for the future installation.

B. Instantaneous Undervoltage Trip Device: For indicated OCPDs.

C. Adjustable-Time-Delay Undervoltage Trip Devices: For indicated OCPDs.

D. Shunt-Trip Devices for Circuit Breakers: Where indicated, arrange to trip breaker from an external source of power through a control switch or relay contacts.

3PART - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Independently Mounted OCPDs: Locate as indicated and install in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. OCPDs in distribution equipment shall be factory installed.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components in accordance with Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."

3.3 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between OCPDs and control/indication devices as specified in Division 16 Section "Wires and Cables" for hard wired connections.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Check connectors, terminals, bus joints, and mountings for tightness. Tighten fieldconnected connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with



equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Provide equipment grounding connections for individually mounted OCPD units as indicated and as required by NEe. Tighten connectors to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A to assure permanent and effective grounding.


A. Independent Testing Organization: Arrange and pay for the services of an independent electrical testing organization to perform tests and observations on OCPDs.

B. Reports: Prepare written reports certified by testing organization on tests and observations. Report defective materials and workmanship and unsatisfactory test results. Include complete records of repairs and adjustments made.

e. Labeling: Upon satisfactory completion of tests and related effort, apply a label to tested components indicating test results, date, and responsible organization and person.

D. Schedule visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests with at least one week's advance notification.

E. Pretesting: Upon completing installation of the system, perform the following preparations for independent tests:

1. Make insulation resistance tests of OCPD buses, components, and connecting supply, feeder, and control circuits.

2. Make continuity tests of circuits. 3. Provide set of Contract Documents to test personnel. Include full updating on final

system configuration and parameters where they supplement or differ from those indicated in original Contract Documents.

4. Provide manufacturer's instructions for installation and testing of OCPDs to test personnel.

F. Visual and mechanical inspection: Include the following inspections and related work.

1. Overcurrent-Protective-Device Ratings and Settings: Verify indicated ratings and settings to be appropriate for final system arrangement and parameters. Where discrepancies are found, test organization shall recommend final protective device ratings and settings. Use accepted revised ratings or settings to make the final system adjustments.

2. Inspect for defects and physical damage, NRTL labeling, and nameplate compliance with current single line diagram.

3. Exercise and perform operational tests of all mechanical components and other operable devices in accordance with manufacturer's instruction manual.


2.

8.


4. Check tightness of electrical connections of OCPDs with calibrated torque wrench. Refer to manufacturer's instructions for proper torque values.

5. Clean OCPDs using manufacturer's approved methods and materials. 6. Verify installation of proper fuse types and ratings in fusible OCPDs.

G. Electrical Tests: Include the following items performed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions:

1.

3.

4.

5. 6. 7.

9.

10.

Insulation resistance test of OCPD conducting parts. Insulation resistance less than 100 megohms is not acceptable. Contact resistance test or measurement of millivolt drop across contacts of drawout circuit breakers and fused power circuit devices at rated current. Compare contact resistance or millivolt drop values of adjacent poles and of similar breakers. Deviations of more than 50 percent are not acceptable. Insulation resistance test of fused power circuit devices and insulated-case and molded-case circuit breakers over 600-ampere frame size at 1000 V d.c. for one minute from pole to pole and from each pole to ground with breaker closed and across open contacts of each phase. Insulation resistance less than 100 megohms is not acceptable. Use primary current injection to check performance characteristics of trip units of insulated-case circuit breakers and molded-case breakers over 600-ampere frame size. Trip characteristics not falling within manufacturer's published time-current characteristic tolerance bands when adjusted to approved parameters are not acceptable. Perform the following tests:

a. Determine minimum pickup current acceptable per manufacturer's instructions.

b. Determine long-time delay at 300 percent pickup current. c. Determine short-time-pickup current and corresponding delay time. d. Determine ground-fault current pickup and corresponding delay time. e. Determine instantaneous pickup current value.

Verify trip unit reset characteristics for insulated-case circuit breakers. Make adjustments for final settings of adjustable-trip devices. Activate auxiliary protective devices such as ground fault or undervoltage relays, to verify operation of shunt-trip devices. Check stored-energy charging motors for proper operation of motor, mechanism, and limit switches. Check operation of electrically operated OCPDs in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Check key and other interlock and safety devices for operation and sequence. Make closing attempts on locked-open and opening attempts on locked-closed devices including moveable barriers and shutters.

H. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and provide retesting of OCPDs by testing organization. Verify by the system tests that specified requirements are met.

3.7 CLEANING



A. Upon completion of installation, inspect OCPDs. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Training: Arrange and pay for the services of factory-authorized service representatives to demonstrate OCPDs and train Owner's maintenance personnel.

B. Conduct a minimum of one half day of training in operation and maintenance as specified under "Instructions to Owner Employees" in the "Project Closeout" Section of these specifications. Include both classroom training and hands-on equipment operation and maintenance procedures.

C. Schedule training with at least seven days' advance notification.

3.9 COMMISSIONING

A. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 2 months after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of OCPDs including their line and load connections, fuses, and fuse clips. Also scan OCPD contact structures where accessible to a portable scanner. Include individual OCPDs and those installed in switchboards, panelboards, and motor control centers.

B. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform two additional follow-up infrared scans of the same devices: one four months after Substantial Completion, and one 11 months after Substantial Completion.

C. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration.

D. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report identifying all OCPDs checked and describing results of scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and res canning observations after remedial action.



( \

SECTION 16477 - FUSES

lPART - GENERAL


Section 16477 - Page 1 of 4 FUSES




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes fuses rated 600 V and below and accessory items. Types of products in this Section include the following:

1. Plug Fuses. 2. Cartridge Fuses. 3. Spare Fuse Cabinet.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections:

B. Product Data for fuses. Include descriptive data and time-current curves for all fuses and let-through current curves for those with current limiting characteristics.

C. Coordination Study: Where fuses of a manufacturer other than the one designated in the Schedule of Fusible Devices are selected, submit a full coordination study showing graphically that the substitute fuses coordinate selectively with both upstream and downstream components. Prepare the study under the supervision of a registered professional engineer in accordance with ANSI/IEEE Standard 242-1986, "Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems." Include single line diagram, coordinated time/current characteristics, fuse performance curves, and fault current calculations adequate to demonstrate satisfactory component protection and selective coordination of protective devices.

D. Coordination study showing graphically how fuses coordinate selectively with both upstream and downstream components. Perform study under the supervision of a registered professional engineer in accordance with ANSI/IEEE Standard 242-1986, "Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems." Include single line diagram, coordinated time/current characteristics, fuse performance curves, and fault current calculations adequate to demonstrate satisfactory component protection and selective coordination of protective devices.



E. Shop drawing of spare fuse cabinet showing dimensions and features including storage provision for fuse cartons.



B. UL Listing and Labeling: Items provided under this Section shall be listed and labeled by UL.

C. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory Listing and Labeling (NRTL): Items provided under this Section shall be NRTL listed and labeled. The term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.


A. Deliver spare fuses stored in locked spare fuse cabinet after cabinet has been installed.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Maintenance Stock, Fuses: For types and ratings required, furnish spare fuses, amounting to one unit for every 5 installed units, but not less than one set of 3 of each kind.

2PART - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Brush Fuses, Inc. Z. Bussmann Div., Cooper Industries, Inc. 3. Eagle Electric Mfg. Co., Inc. 4. Ferraz Corp. S. General Electric Co. 6. Gould, Inc. 7. Littelfuse, Inc.

2.2 FUSES, GENERAL

A. General: Provide fuses of types, classes, and current ratings as indicated. Voltage ratings


shall be consistent with the circuits on which used.


B. Fuses for Direct Current Circuits: Marked for such use by the manufacturer on the fuse label.

2.3 PLUG FUSES

A. Standard: Comply with UL 198F "Plug Fuses."

B. Type: Type S, dual-element, time delay.

2.4 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. General: Comply with ANSI/IEEE Standard FU1, "Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses." Provide nonrenewable-cartridge-type fuses except as indicated.

1. Class J Fuses: Comply with UL 198C, "High-Interrupting Capacity Fuses, CurrentLimiting Type."

2. Class L Fuses: Comply with UL 198C, "High-Interrupting Capacity Fuses, CurrentLimiting Type.

3. Class RKl and RK5 Dual Element Time Delay Fuses: Comply with UL 198E, "Class R Fuses."

4. Class RKl Fast Acting Fuses: Comply with UL 198E, "Class R Fuses."

2.5 SPARE FUSE CABINET

A. Cabinet: Wall-mounted, 18 gage minimum steel unit with full-length, recessed pianohinged door with key coded cam lock and pull.

B. Size: Provide for orderly storage of all spare fuses of this project plus 15 percent spare capacity, minimum.

C. Finish: Gray baked enamel.

D. Cabinet Door: Bear the legend in stencilled 1-1/2-inch-high letters, "Spare Fuses."

3PART - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION OF FUSES

A. General: Apply fuses as indicated and as follows:

B. New General Purpose Fusible Switches: Apply the following class and types:

1. 2. 3.

30-600 Amperes: Class RK1, time delay. 601-1,200 Amperes, Motor or Transformer Circuit: Class L, time delay. 601-1,200 Amperes, Noninductive Circuit: Class L, fast acting.



c. Bolted Pressure Switches: Class L, time delay.

D. Service Protectors: Class L, time delay.

E. Fusible Switch Panelboards: Class RK1, time delay.

F. Combination Starters: Class RK1, time delay.

G. Combination Starters in Motor Control Centers: Class RK1, time delay.

H. Switches in Switchboards: Apply the following classes and types:

1. 60-600 Amperes: Class RK1, time delay. 2. 601 Amperes and Above: Class L, time delay.

I. Existing General-Purpose Switches: Apply the following classes and types:

1. 30-600 Amperes: Class RIG, time delay. 2. 601-1,200 Amperes: Class L, time delay.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices as indicated.

B. Install spare fuse cabinet wall mounted where indicated.

C. Coordination Study: Where coordination study recommends changes in types, classes, features, or ratings of fuses or fusible devices from those indicated, and those changes are approved, make them with no change to the contract price or time of completion.

D. Coordination Study: Where coordination study recommends changes in types, classes, features, or ratings of fuses or fusible devices from those indicated, make a written request for instructions. Obtain instructions before ordering fuses recommended to be changed.



. " c-, ,

SECTION 16525 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING

1PART - GENERAL


Section 16525 - Page 1 ofB EXTERIOR LIGHTING


1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes exterior lighting fixtures, lamps, ballasts, poles standards, and accessories.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Fixture: A complete lighting unit. Fixtures include a lamp or lamps and parts required to distribute the light, position and protect lamps, and connect lamps to the power supply.

B. Lighting Unit: A fixture, or an assembly of fixtures with a common support, including a pole or bracket plus mounting and support accessories.

C. Luminaire: A fixture.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Product data describing fixtures~ lamps, ballasts, poles, and accessories. Arrange product data for fixtures in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, poles, accessories, and the following:

1. Outline drawings of fixtures and poles indicating dimensions and principal features.

2. Electrical ratings and photometric data with certified results of independent laboratory tests.

C. Product certifications signed by manufacturers of lighting units certifying that their products comply with specified requirements.

D. Shop drawings from manufacturers detailing nonstandard fixtures and poles and indicating dimensions, weights, methods at field assembly, components, and accessories.

E. Fixture Samples for Verification Purposes: A sample of each individual fixture type listed below:

F. Samples for Finish Verification Purposes: A sample of finished material of items listed


Section 16525 - Page 2 of8 EXTERIOR LIGHTING

below:

G. Maintenance data for products for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1.


A. Comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code" for components and installation.

B. Fixtures for Hazardous Locations: Conform to UL 844, "Electric Lighting Fixtures for Use in Hazardous (classified) Locations" or get Factory Mutual Engineering and Research Corporation (FM) certification for the class and division of hazard.

C. Comply with ANSI C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."

D. Listing and Labeling: Provide fixtures and accessories that are listed and labeled for their indicated use and location on the Project.

1. Special Listing and Labeling: Provide lighting units for hazardous (classified) locations that are listed and labeled for the specific hazard.

2. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the "National Electrical Code," Article 100.

3. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualification: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

E. Manufacturers' Qualifications: Firms experienced in manufacturing lighting units that are similar to those indicated for this Project and that have a record of successful inservice performance.

1.6 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF POLES

A. General: Store poles on decay-resistant treated skids at least 1 ft. above grade and vegetation. Support pole to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation.

B. Wood Poles: Do not drag treated poles along the ground. Do not handle poles with tongs, cant hooks, and other pointed tools capable of producing indentation more than 1/4 inch in depth. Do not apply tools to ground line section of poles.

C. Fiber Glass Poles: Retain factory-applied pole wrappings until just before pole installation. Handle poles with web fabric straps.

D. Metal Poles: Retain factory-applied pole wrappings until just before pole installation. For poles with nonmetallic finishes, handle with web fabric straps.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Project Warranty: Submit a warranty, mutually executed by manufacturer and the Installer, agreeing to replace external parts of lighting fixtures exhibiting a failure of



finish as specified below. This warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights and remedies the Owner may have under the Contract Documents.

1. Protection of Metal from Corrosion: Warranty against perforation or erosion of the finish due to weathering.

2. Color Retention: Warranty against fading, staining, and chalking due to the effects of weather and solar radiation.

3. Special Project Warranty Period: 5 years, beginning on the date of Substantial Completion.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage, and identified with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to the Owner.

1. Lamps: 10 lamps for each 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least 1 of each type.

2. Glass and Plastic Lenses, Covers, and Other Optical Parts: 1 for each 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least 1 of each type.

3. Ballasts: 1 for each 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least 1 of each type.

4. Globes and Guards: 1 for each 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least 1 of each type.

2PART - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIXTURE COMPONENTS, GENERAL

A. Metal Parts: Free from burrs and sharp edges and corners.

B. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum, except as indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

C. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed fixtures.

D. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access Provisions: Smooth operating, free from light leakage under operating conditions, and arranged to permit reI am ping without use of tools. Arrange doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other pieces to prevent accidental falling during relamping and when secured in the operating position. Provide for door removal for cleaning or replacing lens. Arrange for door opening to disconnect ballast.

E. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel.

F. Reflecting Surfaces: Minimum reflectances as follows, except as otherwise indicated:

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.



2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.

G. Plastic Parts: Resistant to yellowing and other changes due to aging and exposure to heat and UV radiation.

H. Lenses and Refractors: Materials as indicated. Use heat- and aging-resistant, resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lens and refractor mounting in fixture doors.

I. Photoelectric Relay: UL 773, "Plug-in, Locking Type Photocontrols for Use With Area Lighting."

1. Contact Relays: Single-throw, arranged to fail in the "on" position and factory set to turn light unit on at 1.5 to 3 footcandles and off at 4.5 to 10 footcandles with 15 seconds' minimum time delay.

2. Relay Mounting: In fixture housing.

2.2 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES

A. Fixtures: Conform to UL 1570, "Fluorescent Lighting Fixtures."

B. Ballasts: Conform to UL 935, "Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts," certified by Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL). Labeled by Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association (CBM).

1.

2. 3.

Type: High-power-factor type rated for minus 20 deg C starting and listed for use in outdoor fixtures. Sound Rating: A or B. Voltage: Match connected circuits.

C. Electronic Ballasts: Solid-state, full-light-output, energy-saving type. Conform to FCC Rules Part 15, Subpart J for electromagnetic interference. Conform to IEEE C62.41, "Guide for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits," Category A, for resistance to voltage surges for normal and common modes.

1. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 20 deg C. 2. Minimum Power Factor: 90 percent. 3. Minimum Operating Frequency: 20,000 Hz. 4. Third Harmonic Content of Ballast Current: Less than 33 percent. 5. F40T12 Lamp Ballasts: Average Input Power 71 watts or less when operating 2

lamps and 36 watts or less when operating 1 lamp, when tested according to ANSI C82.2, "Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts, Methods of Measurement."

2.3 HIGH-INTENSITY-DISCHARGE (HID) FIXTURES

A. Fixtures: Conform to UL 1572, "High-Intensity-Discharge Lighting Fixtures."

B. Ballasts: Conform to UL 1029, "High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts" and ANSI C82.4, "Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps (MultipleSupply Type)." Provide constant wattage autotransformer (CWA) or regulating high-


power-factor type, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Operating voltage matches system voltage.

Section 16525 - Page 5 ofB EXTERIOR LIGHTING

2. Single-Lamp Ballasts: Minimum starting temperature of minus 30 deg C. 3. Construct ballasts so open circuit operation will not reduce the average life. 4. High-Pressure Sodium (HPS) Ballasts: Equipped with a solid-state ignitor/starter

having an average life in the pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at an ignitor/starter case temperature of 90 deg C.

5. Noise: Uniformly quiet operation, with a noise rating of B or better.

C. Instant Restrike Device: Solid-state potted module, mounted inside fixture and compatible with mogul-based HPS lamps, ballasts, and sockets up to 150 watts.

1. Restrike ranges: 105 to 130 Va.c. 2. Output voltage does not exceed 250 V peak or 150 V a.c. RMS.

D. Auxiliary, Instant-On Quartz System: Arrange lamp, socket, and controls for automatic switching of quartz lamp when the luminaire is initially energized and momentary power outages occur. Turn quartz lamp off automatically when lamp reaches approximately 60 percent light output. Mount components internal to the ballast and independent of the incoming line voltage.

2.4 INCANDESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES

A. Conform to UL 1571, "Incandescent Lighting Fixtures."

2.5 FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Pole-Mounted Fixtures: Conform to AASHTO LTS-l, "Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals."

B. Wind-Load Strength: 100 mph and 1.3 gust factor for total support assembly, including pole, base, and anchorage, where used, to carry the fixtures, supports, and appurtenances at the indicated heights above grade without deflection or whipping.

C. Arm, Bracket, and Tenon Mount Materials: Match the poles.

D. Mountings, Fastenings, and Appurtenances: Corrosion-resistant components compatible with the poles and fixtures that will not cause galvanic action at contact points. Provide mountings that will correctly position the luminaire to provide the indicated light distribution.

E. Pole Shafts: Round tapered.

F. Pole Shafts: Round straight.

G. Pole Shafts: Square tapered.

H. Pole Shafts: Square straight.



I. Pole Bases: Anchor type with galvanized steel hold-down or anchor bolts, leveling nuts, and bolt covers.

J. Pole Bases: Embedded type with underground cable entry.

K. Pole Bases: Hinged anchor type with steel hold-down or anchor bolts, leveling nuts, and bolt covers.

L. Poles: Steel tubing conforming to ASTM A 500, Grade B, carbon steel with a minimum yield of 46,000 psi. Poles are l-piece construction up to 40 feet in length and have access handhole in wall.

M. Aluminum Poles: 6063-T6 alloy. Conform to ASTM B 429, "Standard Specification of Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube." Provide access handhole in pole wall.

N. Aluminum Poles: SOS2-H34 alloy. Conform to ASTM 13209. Provide access handhole in pole wall.

O. Metal Pole Grounding Provisions: Welded 1/2-inch threaded lug, accessible through handhole.

P. Fiber Glass Poles: Conform to ANSI C136.30, "Roadway Lighting Equipment-FiberReinforced Plastic (FRP) Lighting Poles." Provide access handhole in pole wall.

Q. Laminated Wood Poles: Pressure-treat with pentachlorophenol preservative. Equip with concealed raceway path connected to access handhole.

R. Pressure-Treated Wood Poles: Conform to ANSI Standard 05.1. Conform to AWPA C4, "Poles, Preservative Treatment, Pressure Processed," for the wood species used. Bore, roof, and gain poles before treatment.

S. Prestressed Concrete Poles: Centrifugally cast, hollow-shaft type. Cure with wet steam and age for 15 days before installation. Fabricate poles with a hard, nonporous surface that is resistant to water, frost, road and soil chemicals, and that has a maximum water absorption rate of 3 percent.

T. Aluminum Mast Arms: Tapered oval arms continuously welded to pole attachment plate and having span and rise as indicated.

U. Steel Mast Arms: . Fabricated from 2-inch pipe, continuously welded to pole attachment plate and having span and rise as indicated.

V. Metal Pole Brackets: Designed to match pole metal. Provide cantilever brackets without underbrace, in the sizes and styles indicated, with straight tubular end section to accommodate the fixture.

W. Wood Pole Brackets: Conform to ANSI C136.13, "Roadway Lighting-Metal Brackets for Wood Poles,"



X. Pole-Top Tenons: Fabricated to support the fixture indicated and securely fastened to the pole top.

2.6 LAMPS

A. Conform to ANSI Standards, C78 series, applicable to each type oflamp. Provide fixtures with indicated lamps. Where lamps are not indicated, provide lamps recommended by manufacturer.

2.7 FINISH

A. Metal Parts: Manufacturer's standard finish except as otherwise indicated. Finish applied over corrosion-resistant primer, free of streaks, runs, holidays, stains, blisters, and similar defects. Remove poles, fixtures, and accessories showing evidence of corrosion or finish failure during Project warranty period and replace with new items.

B. Other Parts: Manufacturer's standard finish except as otherwise indicated.

3PART - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Set units plumb, square, level, and secure according to manufacturer's written instructions and shop drawings.

3.2 CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS

A. Construct concrete foundations with 3000-pound, 28-day concrete conforming to Division 3 Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete." Comply with details and manufacturer's recommendations for reinforcing, anchor bolts, nuts, and washers.

B. Embedded Poles: Set poles to indicated depth, but not less than 1/6 of pole length below finish grade. Dig holes large enough to permit the use of tampers the full depth of the hole. Backfill in 6-inch layers and thoroughly tamp each layer so compaction of backfill is equal to or greater than that of the undisturbed earth.

C. Pole Installation: Use fabric web slings (not chain or cable) to raise and set poles.

D. Fixture Attachment: Fasten to indicated structural supports.

E. Fixture Attachment with Adjustable Features or Aiming: Attach fixtures and supports to allow aiming for indicated light distribution.

F. Lamp fixtures with indicated lamps according to manufacturer's instructions. Replace malfunctioning lamps.

3.3 GROUNDING



A. Ground fixtures and metal poles according to Division 16 Section "Grounding."

1. Poles: Install10-foot driven ground rod at each pole. 2. Nonmetallic Poles: Ground metallic components oflighting unit and foundations.

Connect fixtures to grounding system with No.6 AWG conductor.


A. Inspect installed units for damage.

8. Provide advance notice of dates and times for field tests.

C. Provide instruments to make and record test results.

D. Tests: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing fixtures and energizing circuits with normal power source. Include the following:

1. Photometric Tests: Measure light intensities at locations where specific illumination performance is indicated. Use photometers with calibration referenced to NIST standards.

2. Check for excessively noisy ballasts. 3. Check for uniformity of illuminations. 4. Written report of tests indicating actual illumination results.

E. Replace or repair damaged and malfunctioning units and retest.


A. Clean components on completion of installation. Use methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.

B. Adjust aimable fixtures to provide required light intensities.

